,.

API 570 Practice exam

The following is a collection of questions made from API-570 syllabus. The answers will be found
in the reference publications mentioned in API-570 body of knowledge

This is the "Open Book" portion of the exam. Feel free to use any of the following

1. Determine the MAWP of the following piping system, at the next inspection, based on the following

Design pressure/temperature 100 psig/100oF

NPS 2, Sch.80, A 106 B
Pipe description
Outside diameter of pipe, D 2.375"

Thickness determined from Inspection 0.190"

~
Observed Corrosion Rate 0.03 inches/year

Next planned inspection 5 Years

MAWP: _

A. 674 pslg
B. 323 psig
C. 125 psig
D. Metal loss exceeds the requirements for 5 year inspection Interval

2. What is the pressure design thickness of NPS 10, A516 Gr.65 Type 22 pipe that operate at 1200 psig/750°F
A. 0.432"
B. 0.46"
C. 0.928"
D. Not enough information given

3. A leak test is an alternative to inspection of buried piping. What is the minimum liquid pressure to adequately conduct
this test?
A. 11/2 times the MAWP
B. 1 1/4 times the MAWP
C. 10% greater than MAWP
D. Actual MAWP

4. For a single wall material thickness, over 0.375" through 0.50", what is the hole type designation for a source side
penetrameter
A. 15
B. 17
C. 20
D. 25

5. Give the corresponding "P" number for SA 414 Gr.A material

A. 1
B. 2
C. 3
D. 11B

6. On a class 1500 NPS 4 blind flange, what is the minimum thickness permitted?
A. 1.12"
B. 1.88"
C. 2.12"
D. 2.88"

7. For 1 1/4" thick carbon steel, what is the recommended preheat temperature?
'\. "ON)OF

B. 235°F
C. 175°F
D. None

Mohan R:;j Page 1 cf 22

API 570 final practice exam
A. ASTM A 370
B. ASME Section V
C. API 570
D. AWS D 1.5

16. In the AwsA5.1, what is the designation for cellulose DCEP electrode?
A. E 7018
B. E 7016
C. E 6011
D. E 6010

17. With respect to a Class 400, NPS 12 slip on raised face flange, whose edges of the gasket do not extend to the bolt,
what is the outside diameter of the gasket?
A. 12.75"
B. 15.00"
C. 16.50"
D. 18.00"

18. The base metal is P.No.8, the weld metal is A. No.8-9, and the wall thickness is 1", what is the hold time for heat
treatment
A. None
B. 1 hour
C. 2 hours
D. V2 hour for each 1" thickness

19. On the regularly furnished Class 300 raised face flange, what is the height of the raised face?
A. 0.06"
B. 0.09"
C. 0.19"
D. 0.25"

20. During a welder qualification test on 3/8" plate in the horizontal position, how many guided bends are required?
A. 6 side bends
B. 2 nick breaks
C. 1 face and 1 root bends
D. 4 tensile specimens

21. When inspecting a Class 3 system, what percentage of all suspect areas and areas of damaged insulation should be
examined?
A. 10%
B. 33%
C. 50%
D. 100%

22. A welder who tests on a V2" thick plate, groove weld in the 3G position is also qualified to weld in which other plate
position?
A. Vertical only
B. Flat and horizontal
C. Flat
D. All plate positions

23. After hot bending and forming, heat treatment is required for which P numbers?
A. 3,4,5, 6 and lOA
B.,--1j'2-and7------ ---
C. llASGl and llASG2
D. l,2,8,9A and 98

24. A piping system that operates at a design pressure of 100 psi at 950· F was originally built from NPS 20 EFW (100%
radiographed), V2" wall, A-516 Grade 70, A-671 material. During the last Inspection, the thickness was determined to
be 0.370 inches. The records indicated the corrosion rate to be 0.009 inches per year. What is MAWP if the next
inspection is planned in 5 years?
1\ ~."H) ;_;si
B. 285.17 psi
C. 98.23 psi
D. Not enough information given

25. Can the inspection interval of the system in question 24 be increased to 8 years?
ii. 'Jo
B. -res
c. If (h~ system 'NilS insulated, the; interval c::In be extended
D. :'Jot enol!gh information gi'Jell

API 570 final practice exam Mohan Raj Page 3 of 22

B. No
C. Could be if properly preheated
D. Not enough information

38. Is the thickness range on the WPSsupported by the PQR?

A. Yes
B. No
C. Re qualification is required by API 570
D. Re qualification is required by ASMESection V

39. Is the attached PQRproperly qualified?

A. No, because RT is not allowed during PQRqualification
B. No, because there are not enough tensile tests
C. No, because peening is allowed by ASMEB31.3
D. Yes

40. What should have been the correct number and type of guide bends on the PQR?
A. 6 side bends
B. 2 face and 2 root bends
C. 1 side, 1 face and 1 root bend
D. No side bends required

Mohan Raj Page 5 of 22

!\PI 570 final practice exam
QW-482 (Back)
WPS No. SMAW·P1 Rev. ---

POSTWELD HEAT TREATMENT (OW-407)

POSITIONS (QW·405)
Temperature Range NON E
position(s) of Groove FLAT
Welding Progression: Up lilA-; Down NIA lime Range
Posltlon(s) of Flliet
GAS (QW-408)
Percent Composition
REHEAT (OW-406) Gas{es) (Mixture) . Flow Rate

Preheat Temp. - Min. 50·

Shielding N/A
Interpass Temp .• Max.
Trailing N/A
Preheat Maintenance
Backing NIA
(Continoousor special healingwhere appllcableshouldbe recorded)

ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS (QW-409) ..

Current AC or DC 0C Polarity OCRP

Amps (Range) 70-160 Volts (Range) 19-30

{Amps and volts range should be recorded for each

position, and thickness, etc •• This Information may
be listed In atabu'ar form similar to that shownbe;low.

Tungsten Electrode Size and Type NI A

(Pure Tungsten, 2% Thorated, etc.)
Mode of Metal Transfer for GMA W N/A
(Sprayarc,short-clrculting arc,etc.)
Electrode Wire feed speed range

ECHNIQUE (QW-410)
String or Weave Bead STRING OR weAVE
Orifice orGas Cup Size. NI A
Inltlal al1dlnterpassCleanlng (Elrushir'lQ,Grinding,etc.) HAND AND POWER TOOLS MAY· BE· USED

Method ofBacl< Gouging NI A

Os.cUlatlon N IA
ContactTubetoWorkDlstance ..N/A
Multiple or Single Pails (per side) E-6010 SINGLE E-7018 MULTIPLE
Multiple ()(Single Electrodes SINGLE
TravelSpeed (Range)
Peern~ NONE
Other

3/32- DCEP
, 1./8"

BALANCE SMAW E-7018 3/32 - DCEP

1/8"

API 'J70 final practice exam Mohan Raj IJage 7 of 22

QW-483 (Back)
PQR No. SMAW-P1-A

Tensile Test (QW-150)

Ultlmat!! Ultimate Type of

Total Load Unit Stress Fallure &
lb. psi Location

\ '
t~(; <... \\t.L'l~ ../'v

Guided-Bend Tests (QW-160)

GOOD
GOD
GOOD- POROSITY.1116·· DIA •

.-
Toughnes-s Tests (QW-170)

Fillet-Weld Test . (QW·180)

../ Result-Satisfactory: Yes No PenetratlonlntoParentMetal: Yes _ No~

Macro- Results --'---'---'----------------------

OlherTests
-Type otTest n RT ---GOOD---
Deposit Analysis
Other -------------------------------------------------------------
•••••••••••••••••••. n .••• u ••••••••• u_ ••••••••••••••••••• ".,.'" •••• -..o. i. ~•••••••••O. ~ 0 ••• 0:;. •• j .,.~"" ••• 0 •. e.;' ••••••• -••••• - ••• -••••••• io••'; ••••••••••••••• ",.~.- ."' •••••••••

BR549 J..•.
Stamp No._> .•• p _
Welder'sName BILL. SMITH Clock No.
Testseonductedby: O.K. TEST LAB Laboratory Test No. 11-22-01-637

We certify that the statements in this reCord are correct and that the test welds were prepared. welded. and tested 'n
accordance with the requirements of Section IX of the ASME Code.

ManufActurer _ HIRAM'S WELDING. INC.-

Date 11-22-01 Sy __ u(S•..•.

I.xG....,NuoE •..•Dw.> _
(Detail of rl;lC()rQoftests are Illustrative only and may he modified to GOOfarm to the type and ,lumber oHest required by the Code.)

API 570 final praLtice exam Mohan Raj Page 9 of 22

52. What is the definition of normalizing?
A. Rapid cooling of a heated metal
B. Heating an alloy to a suitable temperature, holding that temperature long enough to allow constituents to
enter into solid solution and then cooling N rapidly enough to hold the constituents.
C. Process where a ferrous metal is heated to a suitable temperature above the transformation range and is
subsequently cooled in still air at room temperature.
D. Heating to and holding at a suitable temperature and then cooling at a suitable rate to reduce hardness,
improve machinability, facilitate cold working, etc.

53. What does the acronym MAWP refer to?

A. Maximum internal pressure permitted in the piping system
B. Minimum internal pressure permitted in the piping system
C. Maximum external pressure permitted in the piping system
D. Maximum external stress permitted in the piping system
and shall be manufactured and identified in accordance
54. Penrtrameters (IQls) shall either be or ---
with ASME.
A. black-type white-type
B. step wedge calibration block
C. hole-type wire-type
D. pica-type elite-type

55. When environmental or operating conditions produce snow and ice loads, these are considered to be -----
A. Dead loads
B. live loads
C. environmental loads
D. structural loads

56. The downstream limit of the Injection point circuit is the second change in flow direction past the injection point or:
A. 25 feet beyond the first change
B. 50 feet beyond the first change
C. 100 feet, if the pipe is straight run
D. No downstream requirement

57. Appropriate permanent and progressive records on each piping system shall include -----
A. all original construction data
B. all jurisdictional requirements
C. original heat and batch numbers
D. system service; classification; identification numbers

58. Piping subject to CUI includes piping insulated for personnel protection, especially:
A. plastic piping
B. glass lined piping
C. carbon steel piping systems
D. carbon steel piping systems operating between 25°F-250°F

59. A leak test was performed on a buried piping system. The system was re pressured to 125 psi four hours into the
test. Sometime during the final four hours, the gauge fell 5
A. The piping system failed.
B. The piping system passed
C. The test must be repeated
D. The piping system must be visually inspected

60. What is the most common use for a globe valve?

A. Prevent back flow
B. Allow full flow
C. Stop all flow
D. Regulate fluid flow

61. What is the minimum lifting power of an AC electromagnetic yoke used in magnetic particle inspection?
,\. ~c ~,::ur~ds ::ft;'-:J p·...;',\,c:r ~;tthi...:,,';,J/(;rnur;j ~,ole sp2jng
B. 10 pounds lifting power at the maximum pole spacing
C. 10 amps lifting power at the maximum pole spacing
D. 30 pounds lifting power at the minimum pole spacing

62. E;(cessive cyclic stresses that are well below the static yield stl ,ngth oi' the material result in -----.
A. mLlterial failure
B. fatigue cracking
t~. Failure cr,\ck~r.g
D. creep n'" .kinq

Mohan Raj Page 11 of 22

API 570 filial ;Jractice exam
C. A flammable material that, when ignited, will create enough heat to stress relieve piping
D. A vibration device that generates heat through friction producing a stress relieved weldment

75. What is the acceptable method to temporarily repair a longitudinal crack in an existing piping system?
A. Installing a full encirclement welded split sleeve
B. Welding over the crack
C. Welding a box over the cracked area
D. Using a full encirclement welded spilt sleeve, with the approval of the piping engineer

76. Erosionof the piping system usually occurs at:

A. Elbows
B. Along straight run pipe
C. Upstream of pump discharges
D. Any low-velocity and low-turbulence areas

77. An operator notice a pipe off its support, what should be done?
A. Ignore the situation
B. Report the situation to engineering or inspection personnel
C. Keep a record of the situation for future reference
D. Contact maintenance personnel for immediate repair
78. When heat treating welded joints between dissimilar ferritlc metals, the temperature range shall be for which metal?
E. The one with the higher temperature range
F. The one with the lower temperature range
G. The average of both materials
H. Either one may be used

79. Bolts should extend during the installation of flanged connections.

A. two threads past their nuts
B. completely through their nuts
C. only half way through their nuts
D. at least 0.5 inches (12.7 mm) past their nuts
his qualifications for that process shall
80. When a welder has not welded with a process during a period of ---~
expire
A. 3 months or more
B. 6 months or more
C. 9 months or more
D. 12 months or more

81. Rerating piping systems may be allowed only if the calculations are performed by ----
A. the piping engineer or the inspector
B. the plant manager
C. an outside engineering firm
D. a third party inspection organization

82. Temperatures above can damage transducers not equipped with delay line material.
A. There Is no limit to temperature
B. manufacturer's specification
C. 280 psi
D. 1,000 psi

83. Where should the numbers be placed on a radiograph?

----A,-Underthe -fIlm-------
B. On the material being radiographed
C. Under the material being radiographed
D. On the film source pack

84. Radiographicprofile techniques are preferred over ultrasonic thickness measuring instruments for pipe diameters of:
A. NPS1 'and over
B. NPS2 and over
C. i'J:'S 1 ::'11 J.j Ui)de(
D. NPS2 and under

85. A pipe has the highest potential of resulting in an immediate emergency if a leak were to occur.
A. Class 3
B. Class 2
C. Class 1
D. Owner/user designated system

Sf;. A WPSshall ha·.e the .. referenced

.11... welder

API 570 final practice exam r·10hi'n Raj Page 13 of n

A. Minimum required piping thickness
B. maximum piping thickness
C. minimum piping thickness
D. average piping thickness

99. What document may be used as a guide when examiners are being qualified by their employer?
A. ASME Section IX
B. ASM E Section V
C. ASNT SNT- TC-1A
D. API 570

100. The minimum allowable thickness of a piping component shall be based on -----
A. pressure/ mechanical and structural considerations
B. previous experience of the owner
C. corrosiveness of the product only
D. availability of piping materials

101. What is the prescribed alignment for the inside surfaces of circumferential welds to be groove welded?
A. ± 1/16"
B. ± 1/32"
C. Within the dimensional limits in the WPS
D. The fabricator's discretion

102. Why should a leaking threaded joint not be tightened while the system Is in service?
A. The craftsman should not be near the threaded connection
B. Rust or corrosion might be holding the pressure
C. The joint might be unscrewed
D. A crack in a thread root might fail

103. The repair organization shall maintain records of welding procedures and welder qualifications and make the
records available to the inspector _
A. prior to the start of welding
B. any time during welding
C. after completion of welding
D. when the repair organization releases the information

104. A transverse crack was discovered in the root pass of a completed weld on the outside of a Category D Fluid Service
piping system during a PT test. Which of the following/' statements is most accurate?
A. The weld is acceptable
B. The PT test should be repeated
C. The welder should be requalified
D. The PT test will not show this type of discontinuity from the outside

105. The transmitted film density through the radiographic image of the body of the appropriate hole penetrameter and
the area of interest shall be minimum for radiographs made with a gamma ray source.
A. 1.8
B. 2.0
C. 2.2
D. 2.6

106. Care should be taken not to during a pressure test.

A. allow any inert gas into the system
B. use water in the system
--co --overcpressure thesystem---- -
D. under-pressure the system

107. In evaluating blisters and laminations in piping/ assessments should be performed in accordance with ---'
A. API RP 579/ Section 7
B. API RP 2207/ Section 2
C. API 598/ Section 1
D. ASME 816.5

108. An area defined by a circle having a diameter not greater than 2 inches for a line diameter not exceeding 10 inches,
in which thickness readings may be averaged is
A. TML
B. WFMT
C. Test point
D. Averaging point

109. The Ii(]uid penetri11t c:\drnination method is an effective means for ';etc,,_ting
A. inter:lal disuJl1tinuities of a y;eld
B. surface discontinuiti"s of a weld

API 570 findl practice exam Mohan Raj Page 15 of 22

D. Hammer test

121. Lower levels of soli resistivity are:

A. Less corrosive than higher resistivity solis.
B. More corrosive than higher resistivity solis
C. Has no effect on corrosion.
D. More desirable because of increased electrolyte.

122. When may welding not be performed?

A. If the weld area is frosted or wet
B. If the weld area Is above 1200 F
C. If the weld area is In an inert atmosphere
D. If the weld area Is not in direct sunlight

123. The minimum required pipe wall thickness or retirement thickness shall be based on pressure, mechanical and
structural considerations using the appropriate design formulae and -----
A. code allowable stress
B. assumption stress
C. nil-weight ductility stress
D. CTOD stress

124. The weld ripples of reinforcement of butt-welded joints shall be before radiography.
A. removed
B. ground flush, with grinding direction parallel to the weld
C. ground flush, with grinding direction perpendicular to the weld
D. removed if irregularities mask discontinuities

125. In lieu of the required heat treatment after welding, what may be used as an alternative?
A. Normalizing/annealing
B. Quenching
C. Air Hardening
D. Strain Harmonics

126. A piping system has a corrosion rate of 0.074 inches per year, the actual wall thickness is 0.370 inches and the
minimum required thickness is 0.1 inch. What is the remaining life?
A. 36.48 years
B. 364.8 years
C. 3.6 years
D. 3.6 months

127. The inspector shall approve all repair and alteration work at designated times, referred to as ------
A. hold points
B. work stop points
C. inspection delay points
D. inspector's discretion

128. Who is authorized to make a tack weld?

A. A qualified welder
B. A helper
C. A fitter
D. The welding foreman

129. The acronym CUI refers to _

A; -- Corrosion Under Insulatlon---
B. Cold Under-ground In-service piping
C. Corrosion Under Inside flow
D. Carpet Under Infra-structure

130. API 570 was developed to provide for the inspection of in-service process piping.
A. recommendations
B. suggestions
C. genei'll guidel1(';t-::s
D. an industry standard

131. During a MT examination, shall be performed on each area.

A. 100% coverage at the required sensitivity
B. a calibration of each piece of magnetizing equipment
C. at least three separate eXiJminatiolls
D. prod spacing of at least

132. An API authorized piping inspector eer 'il<lt:~ is valid fC'r years from its J2tte of issucmce
A. 3

API 570 final practice exam f'iohan i~aj Page 17 of 22

144. Welding repairs of cracks that occurred In-service should not be attempted without prior consultation with the

A. piping engineer
B. inspector only
C. plant manager
D. welding foreman

145. The preferred medium for pneumatic testing of small lines or systems is -----
A. air
B. water
C. Inert gas
D. hydrogen
146. Without the benefit of an impact test, what is the minimum operating temperature for A-l06 Grade B material used
in a Category 0 Fluid Service?
A. -29°F
B. -20°C
C. -20°F
D. OOF

147. The valve used to automatically prevent back flow is valve.

A. gate
B. slide
C. globe
D. ball check
148. All proposed methods of design, execution, materials, welding procedures, examination and testing must be
approved by the _
A. inspector or piping engineer
B. inspector only
C. plant manager
D. new construction contracts

149. In piping systems, the most easily detected problem during operation is ------
A. pipe wall thickness
B. pipe wail thinness
C. pipe coating condition
D. leaks

150. The three well-known methods of determining soil resistivity are, soil bar, soil box and ----
A. A-C Bridge
B. six pin method
C. holiday pipe survey
D. Wenner (4-pin) method

Mohan Raj Page 19 of 22

API 570 final practice exam
.9lPI570Prep.
f£~ 51nswer Xf-y.
. 29. a (Pg.77. Tabla 341.3.2)ASME 831.3
MAWP= 2SEtlD
=2(4.500)(t)(.370·-l~ x .045)] '- 30. a (Pg. 29. Par.T-285) ASME Sac. V
3t' a'(Pg.69.Tabla 331.1.1)ASME B31.3
20
32. c(Pg.69. Tabla 331.1.1) ASME 1;331.3
MAWP= 2 (4.500)(1\(.370- .09) 33; "6.' (Pg. 15.Tabla 2) ASME 816.5a
20
34. c (Pg. 29. Tabla 2-2.5) ASME 816.5a
35:- ,8 (Pg.66. Par. 330.1.4)Al)MEB31.3
MAWP= 2 (4.500)(1)(.280) ~..:'~·36. ,_. d (PQR and WPS
20 37. b (PQR and WPS)
MAWP= 2 (1260)
~8:--1)' (QW-451.1.Pg. 139) ASME Sac. IX
39: .•..•.b(QW-451.1.Pg.139) ASME Sec. IX
20
40..:."·--a-·(QW~51.1.P9. 139) ASME Sec. IX
iJ17--'·'c:t(P9.3·1. Par. 3.12) API 570
MAWP=2Q2Q
20 '42/"""b ..: (Pg.47. Par. QW-300.3)ASME See IX
43dd(Pg.III, Forword)API574
MAWP = 126psl .4i""-::$(pg.4,par. $00.2(b) ASME 831.3
A5.,.. d, (Pg. 5-1, Par. 5.3.1}API570
25. b (Pg 7-:1.Par 7.2) API 570 46.. ',-'a' . (pg. 33, Par. 10.1.2.2)API 574
Solution: 47.'-a- (Pg. 3·2, Par. 3.15) API570
4S~ c (Pg.1-1. Par, 1.2.1) API 570
Next Plan;'ed Inspeetlon:. 8 years 49,: .' d ..•(Pg.34,Par. 311.2A(a)ASME 831.3
EstimatedCorrosionLoss by 51)... b .jPg.151.Par.T-761}ASMESec.V
Next Inspection: 8 x.009 =.072 . 51.•.- d. (Apx. A Pg.A-1, Par.A2) API 570 .
52. e '(Pg. 6,Par. 300.2) ASME 831.3
MAWP ==2SEtID 53.' ." a (Pg. 3-2, Par.3.21) API 570
54. C (Pg'd22,Par.T-233) ASME See V
=2(4.500)(1)(,370 -(2 x .072)] 55. b (Pg. 12, Par.301.6.1}ASMEB31.3
20 56. ," a (Pg.5-1.Par.5.3.1)API570
57. tV (Pg.7-4, Par.7.6)API570
=2(4.50m(m.370 .~·.1441 5s::;:... 3C(pg. 5-3,Par, 5.3,3.1) API 570
20 . 59. b (Pg.9·2,Par.9.2.7) API 570
60. d· (Pg.8,Par.4.3.3) API 574
= 2(4.500)(1)(.226) 61. b«Pg.152.Par.T-762(b}ASME SeeN
20 62. b(Pg.5-5.Par:5.3.9)API570 .
63. a (Pg. 49. Par. QW-304)ASME See IX
= 2U.Q11l .•
e ~7''"-·,3t ....•(Pg. 5-S.Par.5.3.S.t) API 570
20 6~.. I;>.:.(Pg.6·1. Par. 6.2.2) API 570
66.. c ·'(Pg.1-l,Par.1.3) API570 ' ..
= 2Q.M 67. a (Pg. 59.Par. 328.2.2)ASME 831.3
20 68. a (Pg.65, Par. QW-41Q..9) ASME Sec. IX
'69:' d (Pg. 5-7, Par. 5.5.2)API 570
=101.7psl 70. 9 (Pg.12,Par. 4.5.5) API 574
b .•......••....d.......•...•.•..•••••...•··<71. b(Pg.9-2. Par. 9.2.6)API 570
.,' 26; ... -(Pg.7-l,Par.7.2) API570·····72;···a·(pg.5-9. Par. 5;9) API 570."
27. a •JPgs. 69-70 Table 331.1.1) ASME 831.373:..,. .. .t~ (Pg.6,Par. QW-163)ASME See IX
28. ~ •.. (Pg.47,Par.11.1)API574 -]4.· ..--a(Pg. 68, Par. 331.1.6)ASME 831.3
Solution.! = PD/2SE 75. d (Pg. 8-1, Par. 8.1.3.1) API 570
t= (216)(14) 76. a (Pg.5-4, Par. 5.3.6) API 570
2(17,200)(.80) 77; b .' (Pg. 5-6, Par. 5.4.4) API 570
78~..... ? (Pg. 71, Par. 331.2.3(a)ASME B31.3
~ /0:
c"" ;j'- \2g. ,5·10, 23f. 5.: .) ,\PI S70
27,520 80. b (Pg. 51, Par. QW-322.1(a)ASME IX
81.. 'T"li (pg. 8-3, Par. 8.3(a) API 570
t= ~11" 82. b (Pg. 32, Par. 10.1.2.1)API 574

API 570 final practice exam .~ohaJl Raj .'age 21 of 22

!JlPI 570 Prep.
$'KfI.m .9I:its~eT~!:J
83. b (Pg. 24, Par. T-275) ASME Sec. V
84. c (Pg. 5-8, Par. 5.6) ARI570
.375 - .1 Values Substltued
85. c (Pg. 6-1,. Par.6~2.1) API 570
b (Pg. 13, Par. QW-200.1(b) ASME IX 5
86.
87. b (Pg. 3,Par. 4.2) API 574
d (Pg. 75, Par. 340.4{b) ASME 831.3 S.T. Corrosion Rate: 0.06
88.
89. a (Pg. 5-9, Par: 5.8)At'IS70
.a (Pg. 21, Par. T-223) ASME Sec. V 120. d (Pg.38, Par. 10.2.4) API 574
90.
(Pg. 29, Par. T-284) ASMESec.V 121. b (t'g. 9-1, Par. 9.1.4) API 570
122. a (Pg.62, Par. 328.5.1 (e) ASME 831.3
91. a (Pg. 10, Par. QW-194)ASME Sec. IX
92. a (Pg. 6-1, Par. 6.2.3) APIS70 123. a (Pg. 7-2, Par. 7.3) API 570
93. __ 12.. (Pg. 36, Par.1().2.1.5.3)API574 124. d (Pg. 21. Par. T-222.2) ASME See V
94. ··--...:;.....a (Pg. 25, Par. T-277.1(a)ASME Sec. V 125. a (Pg. 71, Par. 331.2.1) ASMEB31.3
95. a (Pg. 6-3, Table 6-1) API 570 126. c (Pg. 7~1, Par. 7.1.1) API 570)
96. a (Pg. 8-2, Par. 8.2.2.1) API 570 Solution: Use Remaining Life Calculation
97. a {Pg.4.9, Par: OW-304) ASME See IX --
98. a (Pg. 47, t'ar.11.1)APf574 < ..•- tactual - ~eQulred
99. c (Pg. 82, Par. 342.1)ASMEB31.3 corrosion rate
10Q. a (Pg. 7-2, Par. 7.3) AP1570 (inches (millimeters) per year]
101. c .{Pg.6, Par. 328A3(a)(1) ASMEB31 ..3
102. d (Pg. 36, Par. 10.2.1.5.3) API 574 .370 - .1 Value Substituted
103. a (Pg. 8-2, Par. 8.2.1 )API 570, - .074
104. d{Pg.77-79, Tbl.341.;3.2)ASMEB3L3
105. b (Pg.28, Par. T-282.1) ASME·SecV Remaining life: 3.6 years
106. c (Pg.37,Par.10.2.3)API574
107. a (Pg. 7-2, Par. 7A{b)API570 127. a (Pg. 8-1, Par. 8.1.2) API 570
108. c {Pg.3-3,Par.3.46)API.570 128. a (Pg; 62, Par. 328.5.1 (c) ASME 831.3
109. b {Pg.122.Par. T-SOO)ASME See V 129. a (Pg. 5-3, Par. 5.3.3) API 570
110. a (Pg.7-2, Par. 7.4 e)AP1570 (--130. d (Pg.19, par. 5.4) API 574
111. a (Pg.8-2,t'ar. 8.2.1) API 570 13t. a (Pg. 134. Par. T-772) ASME Sec.V
112. a (Pg.7t,Par.331.2.5)ASME B31.3 ! 132.8 _ (Pg. A~1. Par.A.2.2) API 570 _.
113. b (Pg. 134, Par. T-761 (c)ASME Sec.V f332.j,iJ:7(Pg.62, Par. 328:5.1(d) ASMEB31.3
\114. d (Pg.64,Par.~28.5.3)ASMEB3t.3 134". ...::.a- '(Pg,36.Par.10.2.1.8)APIS'74
115, a, (Pg. A-1, Par.A.5.2) API 570 13~ b (Pg. 9, Par. 4.3.9) APIS74
116. a (Pg.>29,Par.T -284) ASME Sec. V 136. ~a (Pg.8-1, Par. 8.1.2)API570
117. d (Pg. 8-2,Par. 8.2.1)API570 137. a (Pg. 59, Par. 328.2.2) ASME 831.3
118. a (Pg. 7-1 ,Par. 7.1.1) AP)570 _138. d {Pg.134, Par. T-762(c) ASME Sec. V
Solution: Use Long Term Corrosion Rate'Calculation 139. c (Pg.1-1, Par. 1.1.1) API 570
140. d (Pg.38, Par. 10.2.4) AP.I574
__ t initial.lactual ' 141. d (Pg.9-1,lntroduction)API570
time (yrs) between initial and 142. a_(Pg.59, Par. 328.2.2) ASME 831.3
actualinspectiohs - 143. c (Pg.11,Par.4.5.2)API574
144. a (Pg.8-1, Par.8.1.2)API570
.375 - .1 Values Substituted 145. c' (Pg.37,Par.10.2.3)API574
5 .--'146.- "'0 (Pg. 50, Fig. 323.2.2) API B31.3
147. (J' (Pg.9. Par. 4.3.8) API 574
LT Corrosion Rate: 0.06 148. a (Pg. 8-1. Par. 8.1.2) API 570
1:3. J (Pg. ::::0, Par. 1Q. ~ .1.1; ,\Pl ::'1
119. a (Pg.7-1,Par.7.1.1)API570 150. d (Pg. 38, Par. 10.3.1.4) API 674
Solution: Use Short Term Corrosion Rate Calculation

_ 1previous .J-""!3=cl=u",,,al __
time (yrs) between 'previous and
IT.v: API 570 Abb."'$, Key, $-2003 Page 3
nr:tl!allnspections

API 570 final practice exam Mohan Raj P;:Jge22 of 22

I 570 Prep.
t£7(am Answer 1(ey
13. c(Pg. 85, Par. 345.4.2), ASME 831.3
1. d (Pg. Z-1. Par..7.2)API 570
Solution: Use fonnula 2S~tlR_ PT = 1.5PST/S
PT = 1.5 (100)(20.000)
2 x 20.000 (1.0) [ .190 - (2 x .15)] Values added 10,800
2.375 PT = 3.000.000
10,800
40.000 X 1 X (.190 - (.30\] Values added PT=2n.78 psi
. 2.375 14. a . (Page7-1, Par. 7.2) API.570
Solution: Use 2SEtIO
Cannot subtract ..30 from .190; so the answer is "d"
2. b (Pg. 47, Par. 11.1) API 574 (2 x 12.000) (.80) [.280 - (2 x .05)]
t= PD/2SE 6.625
t";' (1.200) (10.75\
2 (13,900) (1) (19.200) (.180)
t= 1.2..9QQ 6;625
27,800
t =. .46 ~.
3.. c. (Pg.9-2, Par. 9.2.7) API 570 6.625
4. b (Pg. 27, Par. Tab~eT-276) ASME Sec V
5. a (Pg.89, Par. OW/08-422) ASME IX MAWP = 521.66 or 522 pslg
6. ~ (Pg.111,Table24)ASME816.5a 15. a (Pg. 49, Par. 323.3.2) ASME 831.3
7. c .. (Pg.67,Table330.1.1)ASME831.3 16. d (Pg. 60, Par. 328.2.2(g) ASME831.3
8 a (Pg. 7-1, Par. 7.2) API 570' 17. b .. (Pg.136.Table •...E-1, Fig E-2) ASME B16.5a
Solution:··2SEtlD 18. a":' (Pg: 6!HO. Table 331.1.1) ASME 831.3
19.' ft (Pg. 53, Fig. 7) ASMEB16.5a
(2X 20.000) (1.0) [.280 - (2 x .10)] Value Substituted 2Q. ~ (fg.J42.,.par:-qW;;1.?£·1JASMES~pIX
20 21. .. a -(Pg; 6~3,Table 6~~)API p70
22. C (Pg. 151, Par. TableOW-461.9)Sec IX
(40.000) (,08) 2~. a·(pg.~z?,Par. 332.4.1) ASME 831.3
20 24. a ·(f5g·7:·1, Par 7.2) API 570
Solution:
MOO
20 Oeslgn.pressurerr emperature: 100 PSI/9500F
Pipe Descript:NPS 20 EFW (100% radiographed),
160 .500"Wall, A-516 Grade 70, A-671
OutsideOiameter of Pipe: 20 inches
9.. a (Pg. 9-2, Par. 9.2.7, Table 9-1) API 570 Allowable Stress: 4,500 psi
10.. ~ (Pgs. 77-79, Table 341.3.2) ASMEB31.3 Longitudinal Weld Efficiency: 1.0
11. c (Pg. 47, Par.11.1 API 574 Thickness Determiriedfrom Inspection: .370"
t= PO/2SE Observed Corrosion Rate: .009
t= (25) (2.875) Next Planned Inspection: 5 years
2 (20,000) (1) Cst:matdJ Cc'(ros;c(; 3y ~-1ext~:lS;:;:'.~ctjon:J>~"5
t= Z1.ftZ.5
40,000
t:;;; .002"
12. d (Pg. 78. Tbl. 341.3.2. Notfl (H)) ASME 831.3 ITAC API 570 Abb. Ans. Key, S-2003 Page 1

API 570 final practice cxar'i1 Mohan Raj Page 20 of 22

B. 4
C. 5
D. unlimited

133. Peening of the weld is prohibited on what part of the weld?

A. Root and final pass
B. Intermediate passes
C. Along the toe of the weld
D. Within 1" of the weld area

134. The outside diameter of piping in high-temperature service, about SOooF, should be measured to check for ---
A. creep
B. diameter enlargement
C. swelling
D. internal product build-up

135. A specialized valve generally used in erosive or high-temperature service is a valve

A. swing check
B. slide
C. plug
D. globe

136. Cracks caused by vibration, thermal cycling, thermal expansion problems and environmental cracking are
considered _
A. in-service cracks
B. material cracks
C. delayed cracks
D. HAZ cracks

137. Who has the responsibility for qualifying welding procedures?

A. Each employer
B. Each subcontractor
C. Each welder
D. Each contractor

138. A DC yoke shall have a lifting power of at least _

A. 5lbs.
B. 8lbs.
C. 10 Ibs.
D. 40 Ibs.

139. API 570 covers the inspection of _

A. new construction
B. new tank construction
C. In-service piping
D. In-service vessels

140. Hammer testing of piping is a common practice. However, which of the following should never be hammered?
A. Cast iron piping
B. Caustic piping
C. All welded piping
D. Both A and B

141. Aboveground piping is subject to atmospheric corrosion. What is buried piping subject to?
A. Erosion
B. Anodic reaction
C. Soil electrolytes
D. Soil corrosion

142. When can welding procedures qualified by other than the employer be used?
A. When thRre is c.pf,cific ;lOoroval of the inspRctor
B. When the job contract gives authorization
C. When the proc.edure is used only one time
D. When the production weld is radiographed

143. The type of joints generally limitRd to piping in non critical service NPS 2 and smaller is --.- ----
A. butt welded
B. brazed
C. threadpd
D. c!;,mped

API 570 final practice exam Mohan Raj Plge 18 of 22

C. both Internal and surface discontinuities of a weld
D. subsurface discontinuities of a weld

110. To evaluate the effects of fire damage, an assessment should be performed in accordance with, _
A. API RP 579, Section 11
B. API RP 2207 Section 2
C. API 598, Section 1
D. ASME 816.5

111. The repair organization shall use welders and welding operators qualified In accordance with the code to which the
piping was built or alternatively _
A. ASME B 31.3
B. ASME Section V
C. AWS D 1.1
D. API 1104

112. When an entire piping assembly is to be heat treated, but it will not fit into the furnace, what action should be
taken?
A. Heat treat in more than one heat, with a 1" overlap
B. Heat treat as much as possible and hardness test the untreated area
C. Radiograph the untreated area
D. MT the untreated area

113. What is the maximum allowable deviation for the ammeter on each piece of magnetizing equipment?
A. 30%
B. 10%
C. 20%
D. 15%

114. A qualified welder may seal weld a threaded joint if _

A. the joint is leaking
B. the joint has straight threads only
C. the joint has tapered threads only
D. all exposed threads are covered

115. Actively engaged as an authorized piping inspector shall be defined as a minimum of time spent
performing inspection activities.
A. 20%
B. 30%
C. 40%
D. 50%

116. An inspector is evaluating a radiograph, a light image of a uB" appears on a darker background of the radiograph,
the _
A. radiograph shall be considered unacceptable
B. radiograph should not be rejected
C. "B" is for identification of the welder
D. "B" is for identification of the weld

117. All piping system repair and alteration welding shall be done in accordance with:
A. ASME BPV IX
B. ASME B31.G
- C.- API 570
D. The code to which the system was built.

118. A piping system started with a wall thickness of 0.375 inches. Over a five year period the wall thickness is now
0.1". What is the long term corrosion rate?
A. 0.055 inches per year
B. 0.005 inches per year
C. 550 Inches per year
D, Not ,'nOl!nh information ']!ven

119. Given the above information, what is the short term corrosion rate of the above piping system?
A. 0.055 inches per year
B. 0.005 inches per year
C. 550 Inches per year
D. Not enough informatj'Jn given

17.0. Whe,1 t2sting Clst iron pipe vvhich of the following m,'trods shoulrl not be used?
/1. Radiographic test
L3. Leak test
C. Ultrasonic test

APr 570 final practice exam Mohan Raj Page 16 of 22

B. PQR
C. NACE
D. PDQ
87. What is the most common method used to manufacture tubing?
A. Riveted
B. Seamlessly drawn
C. Wire drawn
D. Forged

88. A piping inspector employed by the owner operator shall have _

A. an API 653 certification
B. an AWS certification
C. an API 510 certification
D. not less than 10 years experience dealing with piping

89. Repair materials shall be verified for conformance to the applicable code and shall be compatible with the original
material by the "
A. inspector
B. piping engineer
C" repair organization
D. the purchasing department

90. The letter "B" is placed on radiographic film holder for what reason?
A. To determine if back scatter radiation is exposing the film
B. To show the distance from the source of radiation to the weld
C. To function as a location marker for the radiograph
D. To designate whether the penetrameter is on the film side or the back side

91. A visual examination of performance test coupons shall "

A. show complete joint penetration and complete fusion of weld metal and base metal
B. show no more than 1/3t inadequate penetration
C. show no more than 1/3t non fusion
D. be allowed one 5/32" crater crack

92. Piping systems that are not located in high activity areas and do not significantly vaporize are designated as --'
A. Class 3
B. Class 2
C. Class 1
D. Owner/user designated system

93. Of the following examples, which one may cause a leak in a threaded joint?
A. Back welding the fitting
B. Lack of thread lubricant
C. Under pressuring the part
D. Changing the direction of flow in the piping system

94. Penetrameters are normally placed on the side of the part being examined.
A. source
B. film
C. weld
D. reverse

95. What is the maximum thickness measurement inspection interval for an injection point?
A. 3 years
B. 5 years
C. 10 years
D. By Class

96. Exemptions for preheating and post weld heat treatment must be approved by the _
A. pipillfl ppr]!nppr
B. inspector
C. applicable standard, API S70
D. repair procedure.

97. A welder qualified to weld in accordance with one qualified WPS is also qualified to weld ._.
A. using the same welding proress within the limits of the essential v'lriables
B. any other qualified weld procedure
C. using a different welding process of a Cj!lalified '."eld procedure
D. any WPS develope'.! ;,nd ''''st,'d by the w"I.1"r'5 employer

98. The formula t '" PD/2SE com: utes the ..

ArI 570 final practice exarn r~ohan Raj Page 14 of 22

63. A welder may be qualified by AT in any welding process except for which of the following?
A. GMAW (short circuiting mode)
B. GMAW (spray arc mode)
C. FCAW
D. SMAW

64. Austenitic stainless steel piping systems operating between 150°F-400°F are susceptible to:
A. temper embrittlement
B. chloride stress corrosion cracking
C. CUI
D. Both Band C

65. What classification does the majority of unit process piping fall In to?
A. Class 3
B. Class 2
C. Class 1
D. Owner/user designated system

66. provides general requirements and detailed assessment procedures for specific types of degradation that are
referenced in API 570.
A. API 598
B. API 653
C. API RP 579
D. ASME 816.5

67. Welding procedures qualified by may be used, subject to the specific approval of the inspector
A. others
B. the employer
C. the use of AWS pre qualified, D1.1 type procedures
D. the use of API 1104 qualified procedures

68. A weld is changed from multi pass per side to single pass per side. How does this effect the PWHT limitation?
A. This limitation does not apply when a WPS is qualified with a PWHT above the upper transformation
temperature
B. This limitation does not apply when a WPS is qualified with a PWHT below the upper transformation
temperature
C. The PWHT is not a consideration
D. The PWHT must be performed per ASME IX and time increased byone

69. Besides ultrasonic instruments, what other method can be used to determine thickness measurements?
A. AET
B. ET
C. MT
D. RT

70. Which of the following methods can be used to join cast iron pipe?
A. Welding
B. Compression
C. Epoxy resin
D. Bell and spigot

71. Buried piping inspected periodically by excavation shall be inspected in lengths of:
___A._3 feet-=-5. feet
B. 6 feet -8 feet.
C. Any length as long as It IS Inspected full circumference.
D. Any length as long as it is inspected 180° circumference.

72. In a piping circuit, which of the following does not routinely have thiCKness measurements taken?
A. Valves
B. Straight Run Pipe
C. FittinQs
D. Dead legs

73. What is the maximum measurement for open defects in the weld or heat affect zone for a guided bend specimen?
A. 1/16"
B. 1/8"
C. 3/16"
D. No op"n defects are allowed

74. Vvhat is a rhermu(Guple pyronl'ct'"r?

}\. A devil'" lIsed to check t he heat treatment temper "CUr,", I: ;[:c:'y onikct,c::J 1,,/ LClo-',-"i['Jrdischar".~ welding
B. A device taped to the pipe that will record temperature vari'1tions

API 570 final practice exam Mohan Raj Page 12 of 22

The reminder of the exam is "Closed Book".
The use of reference publication is not permitted.
41. According to API 570, a(n) is a person who assists the inspector by performing specific NDE testing.
A. NDE technician
B. Inspector assistant
C. Level II inspector
D. Examiner

42. More than one contractor, manufacturer or installer may simultaneously qualify a welder. In such case, each
participating organization shall be represented by during the test.
A. A certified welding inspector
B. A responsible employee
C. The welder's supervisor
D. A welding engineer

43. Which of the following best describes API 574?

A. code
B. Standard
C. specification
O. Recommended practice

44. The potential for personnel exposure is deemed to be significant in which fluid service?
A. Category M fluid service
B. High pressure fluid service
C. Normal fluid service
D. Category B fluid service

45. When an injection point circuit for the purpose of inspection is designated, the recommended up stream limit of the
injection point circuit shall be the greater of ?
A. minimum 12 inches
B. maximum 12 inches
C. three pipe diameters
D. both A and C

46. can cause flame detectors used to indicate a furnace or boiler fire to give false indications on control
panels.
A. Welding or related repairs on piping
B. Piping alterations in the shop
C. Ultrasonic inspection
D. Radiographic inspection

47. After application of a non destructive evaluation technique, any resulting evidence is commonly referred to as ---
A. A crack
B. porosity
C. aleak
D. an indication

48. API 570 applies to piping systems for process fluids such as:
A. Firewater
B. Plumbing, sanitary sewers and storm sewers
C. Raw, intermediate, and finished products.
D." Piping systems-ontrucks;·stiips and barges

49. Which of the following applies to socket welds in piping systems?

A. Should be avoided
B. Should be used in all welded piping
C. Should be welded using SAW only
D. Should be avoided where crevice corrosion may occur

)0. t:dcil fJkce uf IIldylieLiLiny eLjUlpllielit shdil oe cdiillldteJ

A. ilt the beginning of each shift ------
B. at least once a year or whenever the equipment has been subject to major electrical repair
C. whenever the technician feels like it
D. at least once every 90 days

51. An individual who holds an engineering degree is automatically qualified as .

A. an authorized piping inspector
e. a piping Ins~'ector
C. a Nfl!" I.pvelll or In -'1 .'ll/, te'~hnirlue
D. None of the <:1bove

API 570 linal practice exam Hohan Raj Page ;0 of 22

•. QW-483 SUGGESTED FORMAT FOR PROCEDURE QUALIFICATION RECORD (paR)
wi (See QW-200.2, SectlorilX,ASMEBoller and Pressure Vessel Code)
Record Actual·Condltlons Used to Weld Test Coupon

CompanyName HIRAM'S· WELDING. INC.

Date '1122/01
ProcedureQualification Record No. SMAW P1-A
WPSNo. SMAW -P1 .
Welding Process(es) _S•••.
· .••.
Mu:A:!...Wu.- ----
Types (Manual,Automatic, Semi-Auto.) t'---------------
.-.IaMILA;uN'-'-U:lLLJ
•• A

OINTS (QW-402)

1(
11
3/32"-1/16"
;~ .

. GrooveDesign of Test Coupon

For combination uallfications the de oslted weld metal thlcknesswBl be ra ulred for each filler metal or rocess used.
BASE METALS (QW-403) POSTWELD HEATTREATMENT(QW-407)
Material Spec. A-10B Temperature NONE
ype or Grade B llme NIA
P. No. 1 to P-No. 1. Other
ickness ofTestCoupon .500
Diameterof TestCoupon NPS 8
Other GAS(QW-408)
. Percent Composition
Gas{es) (Mixture) FlowRate
Shielding N/A
7018 Trailing N/A
FILLER.METALS (QW-404)
Backir(l N/A
SFA SpecifICation
WSClassification
ELECTRICALCHARACTERISTICS~QW-40fl)'
FillerMetal F-No.
---... eld Meal Analysis A-No. Current DC
Polarity DC EP
Sizeof Fill~r Metal
Amps. 70-160 Volts 19- 30
Other
TungstenElectrode Size NIA
Other

POSITION(QW-405) TECHNIQUE (QW-41 0)

TravelSpeed 1· 112 - 8 IPM
Position 01 Groove 6G .
eld Progression(Uphill. Downhill) UPHILL Stringor Weave Bead BOTH
Oscillation Nt A
ther
Multipassor Single Pass (per side) BOTH
Singleor Multiple EI1ctrodes ~J....E...-...._
PREHEAT (QW-406)
PreheatTemp.
Interpass Temp.
50°F
.I;t'_
ther

~E__
-
,t PI .570 final practice exam Mohan Raj Page 8 of 22
QW.482 SUGGESTED FORMAT FOR WELDING PROCEDURE SPECIFICATIONS (WPS)
•••••.. (See QW.200.1,Sectlon IX, ASME Boller and Pressure Vessel Code)

By: I.A. WELDER

Company Name: HIRAM'S" WELDING. INC.
Date: 11122/01' Supporting PQR No.(s) SMAW·P1·A
Welding Procedure Specification No. SMAW·P1
Revision No.' . Date:
Welding Process(es): S MAW Type(s): .I1Mu::A,-"NUlUr..cAu.L~ ------------------
. Automatlc Man al Mactilneor Semi-Auto
Details
JOINTS (QW-402)
Joint Design SINGLE VEE. ALL FILLETS
Backing (Yes) (No) X
Backing Material (Type) NfA
(Refer to both backing and retainers)

o
o
Metal

Nonmeta6c
0 Nonfuslng Meal

o Other 1(
Sketches, Production Drawings, Weld Symbols or Written Des-
cription should show the general arrangement of the parts to be
I I
welded." Where applicable, the ro.ot spacing and the details of 3/32" - 1116"
weld groove may be speclfied. "

. (Atthe option ofthe Mfgr., sketches may beattaohedto lIIus-

tratejolntdesign. weld layers and bead sequence; e.g .• for
notch toughness procedures, Jormultipleprocess procedures.
etc.)

*BASE METALS (QW-403)

. P-No ..---1--. Group No. -1- to P~No. 8 Group N9. 1
-OR
Specification type and grade
to Specification type and grade
OR
Chern. Analysis and Mech. Prop.
to Chern ..Analysis and Mech.Prop.
Thickness. Range:
Base Metal: Groove .125 ..,. 1" Fillet ALL
Pipe Dia. Range: Groove UNLIMITED Fillet ALL
Other: 'No pass Qreater than 1/2"

"FILLER METALS (QW-404) SMAW SMAW

Spec. No. (SFA)
.. " H.AWSNo.(Class)
F-No.
A·No. II

Size. of. FUierMetals

Weld Metal
Thickness Range:

~~~::~la.S)--:±:=-~~
Groove __ . _.250" max, ,]50" max

~,:~~ I~-~;;;,,-._
±=llL~'- --'l=..L~I.L~""~'-----
Consumable Insert ._
Other ~PPLEMI;NIAL.flb.tER SIiALLtJ.QT BE USED
--.----.-----------------.
"Eac~ base rnelaHilier metal combination
_______ -d .. should be
,_.__recorded
..;......_
... .. individually
..:...- -'-->. _~_. .~_. ~ __.__ 0._'_'-- .. -..-~- - ._---,

API 570 fi'lal practice exam Mohan Raj Page 6 of 22

26. What the MAWP is recalculated, the wall thickness used shall be the actual thickness minus:
A. The estimated corrosion loss before the date of the next inspection
B. Twice the estimated corrosion loss before the date of the next inspection
C. Three times the estimated corrosion loss before the date of the next inspection
D. The estimated corrosion loss before the date of the next inspection

27. The base metal is P No.1, the weld metal is A No.1, and the wall thickness is 7/8". What is the holding time at 1100-
1200°F for heat treatment
A. 1 hour
B. 2 hours
C. 3 hours
D. Procedure is not required for this thickness

28. What is the required thickness of straight run pipe subject to internal pressure only, based on the following
conditions: NPS 14, SA 285 Gr.C, EFW Spiral seam (No radiography), operating at 216 psi I 378°F
A. 0.11"
B. 1.1"
C. 0.06"
D. Not enough information given

29. The radiograph of a Normal Fluid service piping weld revealed a crack. What is the acceptable crack length if the pipe
wall was 0.375?
A. None
B. T/3
C. 3/16"
D. Cracks will not show on radiographs

30. Geometric unsharpness of the radiograph of a component under 2" thlck shall not exceed ----
A. 0.020"
B. 0.030"
C. 0.040"
D. 0.050"

31. What is the maximum Brinell hardness of base metal P-6?

A. 241
B. 270
C. 281
D. not specified

32. What is the minimum holding time of SA-l06 Grade B, 1 inch thick material?
A. 2.4 hours
B. 2 hours
C. 1 hour
D. not specified

33. What is the working pressure of a 150 lb. flange, SA 350 Gr.LF6 CL 1/ used at 400°F?
A. 230 psig
B. 200 psig
C. 170 psig
D. 140 psig

34. What is the minimum class flange that can be used if the material is SA 351 Gr.C F8C, temperature 950°F and
working pressure is 1930 psig
A. 800
B. 900
C. 1500
D. This material can not be used at this temperature

35. The preheat zone shall extend beyond each edge of a pipe weld
A. 1"
R. ')"
C. 2T
D. 3T

36. What is the root face limitation as listed on the attached WPS and PQR
A. 3/32"
B. 1/8"
C. No limit
I). Not (;C'signated

37. If tho, silfJpurli: '.J PQR is used, iJre the P-110'S '.:orrect Oil the Jttact:ed 1;:'<:;7
.\. Yes

Mohan Raj Page 4 of 22

API 510 final pract'cc exam
\

8. Determine the MAWP of the following piping system, at the next inspection, based on the following

Design pressure/temperature 100 psig/100°F

NPS 20, Sch. std, A 106 B
Pipe description
Outside diameter of pipe, 0 20"

Thickness determined from Inspection 0.280"

Observed Corrosion Rate 0.02 inches/year

Next planned inspection 5 Years

MAWP= _
A. 160 psig
B. 550 psig
C. 723 psig
O. 125 psig

9. What is the inspection interval for buried piping without cathodic protection, the soil resistivity is 6,500 ohm-em?
A. 10 years
B. 15 years
C. 5 years
O. whenever a leak is suspected

10. What is the maximum length allowed for individual slag trapped in a weld in a Severe Cyclic Conditions piping
system?
A. >TwX3
B. ~Tw/3
C. ~12T
O. 3/23"

11. What is the design thickness of NPS 2 v., SA106 Gr.B pipe that operates at 25 psi / 200°F
A. 0.275"
B. 0.100"
C. 0.002"
O. not enough information given

12. With respect to Category '0' service, what is the maximum allowable undercut for a branch connection?
A. Zero (no evident imperfections)
B. ~ 1/32"
C. ~ 1 mm
O. Both Band C

13. What is the test pressure of a metallic piping system whose design temperature is above the test temperature using
the following conditions? NPS 6, SA106 Gr.B, 100 psi / 800°F
A. 150 psi
B. 450 psi
C. 278 psi
O. Test temperature verses design temperatures are not different

14. Determine the MAWP of the following piping system, at the next inspection, based on the following

Design pressure/temperature 100 psig/750oF

Pipe description NPS 6, A285 C EFW, Straight Seam(No radiography)

Outside diameter of pipe, 0 6 5/8"

Thickness determined from Inspection 0.280"

Observed Corrosion Rate 0.01 inches/year

L~dIS .~.~ ~ ~

MAWP= _

A. 522 psig
B. 487 psig
C. 878 psig
D. 125 psig

15. Impact testing of each form of material for di1Y speufication 51.,:1 be done uc,'l1g plOC ,jun~s (1·1 aiJ~d3Lus in
accordance with

Mohan Raj Page 2 of 22

API 570 final practice exam
API 570 Model question-l
The following is a collection of questions remembered by various students who took API 570
exam in the past.

The answers will be found in the following reference publications

API 570, RP 574, RP 578, ASMESee.V, See.IX, B 31.3 & B 16.5(a)

1. What is the height of the raised face on regularly furnished class 300 Raised Face Flanges?
A. 0.06
B. 0.09
C. 0.19
D. 0.25

Section/page Reference Publication _

2. In a piping system, NPS 4, SMLS material A-53 Grade B, the thickness near a wel is 0.18 . The system is designed to
operate at 675 PSIG at 500°F. What is the actual remaining corrosion allowance?
A. 0.076
B. 0.080
C. 0.091
D. 0.1

Section/page Reference Publication. _

3. Which of the following are nonessential variables for SMAW?

A. Change of electrode
B. Change in the groove design
C. Change in the PWHT
D. Change in the welding process

Section/page Reference Publication _

4. When designating an injection pOint circuit for the purpose of inspection, the recommended upstream limit of the
injection point circuit is ?
A. Minimum 12 inches
B. Maximum 12 inches
C. Three pipe diameters
D. Both A and C

Section/page Reference Publication _

5. A process in which a ferrous metal is heated to a suitable temperature above the transformation range and is
subsequently cooled in still air at room temperature is referred to as ?
A. quenching
B. Normalizing
C. Annealing
D. Solution heat treating

Section/page Reference Publication _

6. One advantage of isotope radiography is it _

A. Will detect all defects in a pipe weld
B. Can be performed by anyone with little or no training
C. Can not ';upply a permanent visual record
LJ. , "vL dll '~lljtiO)ll :"j(;' ce ill tile jJiesence of iJYU,'OLdi bon~

Section/page ._~_. Reference Publication _

7. A piping circuit, 300 long, operates at 500°F. What is the linear thermal expansion of the circuit if the circuit Nas
constructed uo;ing ,\ 106-:3 piping?
A. 3.62 inches

API .'i10 i>1oclel que:,tion-l Mohan Raj Pag, 1 of 4

B. 2
C. 4
D. None

Section/page Reference Publication. _

16. The owner/user shall maintain appropriate permanent and progressive records of each piping system. The records
shall Include _
A. All original construction data
B. System service; classification; identification numbers
C. All ASME requirements
D. Original heat and batch numbers of the system

Section/page Reference Publication _

17. The maximum carbon content of a mild steel weld deposit is _

A. 0.15% carbon
B. 0.20% carbon
C. 0.30% carbon
D. 0.17% carbon

Section/page Reference Publication _

18. What is the recommended preheat temperature for 1 1f.I" thick carbon steel?
A. 300°F
B. 235°F
C. 175°F
D. None

Section/page Reference Publication _

19. An alternative to inspection of buried piping is to leak test the system with liquid at a pressure at least

A. 1 V2 times the Maximum operating pressure

B. 1 V4 times the Maximum operating pressure
C. 10% greater than the Maximum operating pressure
D. Actual

Section/page Reference Publication. _

20. The F number of SFA-5.1 & 5.5 is:

A. 1
B. 2
C. 3
D. All of the above

Section/page Reference Publication _

21. As a part of general maintenance, any repair organization may make repairs to a piping system as long as:
A. The inspector is satisfied with the competency of the repair organization
B. The piping engineer is on site
C. The repair organization has a contract
D. Their hourly rate is acceptable

Section/page Reference Publication _

22. Welded joints in carbon steel and carbon-molybdenum steel exposed to elevated temperatures of 800°F or over may
be subjected to _
A. Pearlite structure
13. anneallllg
C. graphitization
D. normalizing

Section/page _ .. .__ . Reference Publication . _

23. What is the allowable undercut for 1 branch connection in ('ategory 0 service,'

API ~il 0 Model question-l Mohan Raj Page 3 of -1

API 570 Model question- 1 to 4
Answer Ke\!
The following is a collection of questions remembered by various students who
took API 570 exam in the past.

The answers will be found in the following reference publications

API Standard 570 Piping inspector code

API Recommended practice 574

ASME Boiler & Pressure vessel code

Sec.V Non-destructive examination

Sec. IX Welding and brazing qualifications

ASME B 16.5 Pipe flanges & Flanged fittings

ASME B 31.3 Process Piping

API :.,10 iV'cdel question-l to 4 i:1l1swer key Mohan Rdj Page 1 of 3

No Answer Reference: No Answer Reference:
61 91

62 92

63 93

64 94

65 95

66 96

67 97

68 98

69 99

70 100

71 101

72 102

73 103

74 104

75 105

76 106

77 107

78 108

79 109

80 110

81 111

82 112

83 113

84 114

85 115

86 116

87 117
"--------- ..• ----- --.--------
88

89

90
---.---1--~-~~~=t::-t_I=_
___ ~=-J
API 510 Model question-l to 4 answer key Mohan Raj Page 3 of 3
No Answer Reference: No Answer Reference:
1 A 6.4 Fig.7B 31.3 31

2 32

3 33

4 34

5 35

6 36

7 . 37

8 38

9 39

10 40

11 41

12 42

13 43

14 44

15 45

16 46

17 47

18 48

19 49

20 50

21 51

22 52

23 53

24 54

25 55

26 56
----
7J S7
----~ ------ ~----- --
28 58

29 59
__ _-

-===~J
--.----- ---~~--- ----------- ---,--,_._~---- f----------- ----- -- -~~._-"._~-_. ..

30 60
----~----~~-- .. --- .. --- --------~- - .--
L- _____ ~

Page 2 of 3
A. Zero (no evident imperfections)
B. :;; 1/32 inch
C. :;; 1 mm
D. Both Band C

Section/page Reference Publication _

24. Changing the weld progression from uphill to down hill will have a major impact on _
A. Nick-break strengths
B. Notch toughness properties
C. Tensile strengths
D. Bulge tests

Section/page Reference Publication. _

25. What is the test position when the pipe is horizontal, fixed?
A. 1G
B. 2G
C. 5G
D. 6G

Section/page Reference Publication _

26. API provides a detailed discussion of Inspection of in-service piping welds.

A. Section IX
B. B 31.3
C. 570
D. B 16.5a

Section/page Reference Publication. _

27. TMLs can be eliminated for piping systems with which of the following characteristics:
A. high potential for creating an emergency in the event of a leak
B. extremely corrosive systems
C. low potential for creating an emergency in the event of a leak
D. piping systems in cyclic conditions at high pressures and temperatures

Section/page Reference Publication _

28. When determining the corrosion rate, the formulas from API 570 may be used or:
A. Published data on piping system in comparable service
B. Owner/user's experience
C. Budget restraints
D. Both A and B

Section/page Reference Publication _

29. The owner/user shall maintain appropriate permanent and progressive records about each piping system covered by
API 570, this may be done by:
A. The inspector's memory
B. The project managers secretary
C. Computer based system
D. Records are not a requirement of API 570

Section/page Reference Publication _

30. When the corrosion rte for a piping circuit can not otherwise be determined, the initial thickness measurement
determination shall be made after no more than:
1 ,"lr ~f( ••••

B. 6 months
C. 3 months
D. 30 days

Sect'Cil/page _ Rf'ference PuhFcction _

Mohan Raj PC'!'Je4 of 4

B. 7.24 inches
C. 10.86 inches
D. 14.48 inches

Section/page Reference PubJication _

8. An employer may accept a performance qualification made for another employer provided the _
A. Inspector specifically approves
B. Piping engineer approves
C. Action is allowed by ASME, Section V
D. Other employer is a subcontractor for the current employer

Section/page Reference PubJication _

9. Guided bend specimens for welder qualifications shall have no open defects in the weld or heat affected zone
exceeding _
A. 1/16
B. 1/8
C. 3/16
D. no open defects allowed

Section/page Reference Publication. _

10. The inspector is reviewing a radiograph of a pipe weld, the pipe wall is V2" thick. What is the hole type IQI designation
if the penetrameter is placed on the source side?
A. 12
B. 15
C. 17
D. 20

Section/page Reference Publication _

11. In a piping system, the most susceptible location for cracking is _

A. Around supports
B. In welds
C. In bolting
D. In the areas of temporary clamps

Section/page Reference Publication. _

12. What is the "P"No. for SA 414 Grade A?

A. 1
B. 2
C. 3
D. 11B

Section/page Reference PubJication _

13. What is the minimum thickness of a class 1500 NPS 4 blind flange?
A. 1.12
B. 1.88
C. 2.12
D. 2.88

Section/page Reference PubJication _

14. The preheat zone shall extend at least beyond each edge of the weld
A. 6T
R 1:? inrhps OOn,..,)
c. wall thickness divided by 3
D. 2S mm (1 inch)

Section/page Reference Publication _

15. During procedure qualification, how many nick-break srecimel1s are rCfjuired if the :)ipe is NPS 8 S/80, 0,500 wail?
A. 1

/\,PI I; I) MOr1pl q !Jestion-1 Mohi1n R.'lj Paqe 2 of 4

SET - A
API-Si0 Preparatory Course

1. Following combination of Base metal and welding electrode was

qualified by a certain PQR.Impact testing is not required.
Base Metal = SA 285 Grc Plates, 3/4" thk
Welding electrode = AWS E 6015, 1/8" dia.

This PQRwill qualify which of the following combinations of Base

Metal - Welding electrodes.

a) 1" thk SA 515gr 60 plates, E 6013 electrodes, 5/32 " dia.

b) 1 % " thk SA 285 grc plates, E 6013 electrodes, 5/32" dia.
c) 1 % thk plates plates SA516gr70, E 7018 electrodes, 3/32
dia
d) None of above

2. A pressure vessel is to be constructed to with MDMT = + 20°F,

M.D.C = SA 285 gr C .Required shell thickness = % , Required
dished head thickness = 1 1/8 " thk (torisph) Determine if this
material is suitable for:

a) Both shell as well as Dished head

b) Suitable for head but not for shell
c) Suitable for shell only but not for head
d) Not suitable for either
a. Addition of a reinforced nozzle of size equal to an existing
nozzle
b. Addition of a nozzle not requiring reinforcement
c. Addition of a reinforced nozzle of size greater than an
existing nozzle, where the thickness of reinforcement was
found to be inadequate for the internal pressure
d. Only "b" and "c"

6. In liquid Penetrant Testing, a procedure is qualified to a

temperature of 15 Dc. pick up a correct statement.

a. The same procedure is qualified to the temperature from

10 DC to 52 DC
b. The same procedure is restricted to maximum of 15 DC
only
c. The same procedure shall be applied to 5 DC to 10 DC
d. The same procedure is qualified to the temperature from 0
DC to 5 DC

7. In a magnetic particle testing, the operator reported a rounded

indication with the following dimensions. Major dimension is 6.0

mm and Minor dimension is 3.0 mm. But upon· using a powerful

magnifier, it was revealed that actual defect is only 4 x 1.5 mm.
Based on Acceptance criteria of Asme Sec. VIII, Div 1, the
indication shall be:

a. accepted, as the magnifier shows indication within

acceptance standards

:3
10. Which of the following penetrant system is generally
considered least sensitive?

a. Water-washable - visible dye.

b. Solvent removable - visible dye.
c. Water-washable - fluorescent dye.
d. Post-emulsification - visible dye.

11. MPI can not be adopted for which of the following materials?

a. Iron
b. Steel
c. Austenitic Stain less steels
d. All of the above

12. Which of the following is an advantage of magnetic particle

testing over penetrant testing?
a. It can detect surface discontinuities with foreign material
imbedded in them.
b. It is faster on individual parts.
c. It can detect near-surface discontinuities.
d. All of the above.

13. Which of the following types of discontinuities is not normally

detected by radiography?

a. Cracks

c. Laminations
d. 51::19

,-)
18. Which of the following are excluded from the scope of
application of API 510?

a. Pressure vessels on movable structures covered by other

jurisdictional regulations

b. All classes of containers listed for exemption from

construction in ASME Section VIII Div. 1
c. Pressure vessels which do not exceed volume of the five
cubic feet and pressure of 250 psi
d. All of the above

19. Widely scattered pits may be ignored as long as the following

conditions are satisfied:

a. No pit depth is greater than one half the vessel wall

thickness exclusive of the corrosion allowance.
b. The total area of the pits does not exceed 7 square inches
or 45 square cm within any 8 inch diameter circle
c. The sum of their dimensions along any straight line within
a circle of diameter 8 inches does not exceed 2 inches ( 5
cm)
d. All of the above

20. Each vessel above ground shall be given a visual external

inspection preferably while in operation at a frequency of:

a. At least once in every 5 years

inspection

c. The lesser of "a" or "b"

d. None of the above are applicable

7
2. Which of the following is / are to be undertaken in case the
ownership and location of vessel are changed?

a. The vessel shall be hydro tested only

b. The vessel shall be internally and externally
inspected before it is re-used
c. The allowable conditions of service shall be
established and the next period of inspection shall be
established for the new service.
d. Only "b" and "c"

3. A new pressure vessel should be inspected to which of the

following codes?

a. API 510
b. API 572
c. ASME See. VIII Div. 1
d. All of the above

4. For repairs as per API 510, the welders and welding

procedures shall be qualified to the requirement of:

a. API 1104 code

b. ASME Section V
c. ASME Section IX
d. AWS D 1.1

5. C~'cuLJt8 the ~.':', r ..•.-' .'; ~ ['

I \.,;,.;I J j ~A I
~t;-
j ••
'rl
i
9 ':, ," r. ll, •
1I lei ,) I G '/; ; fIg

data: Actual thickness = 0.955 inch. Minimurn thickness

required = 0.787 inch Thickness at pervious irspection 5
year's prior to present inspection = 1.015 inch
a. 10,000 hours of service
b. 1000 hours of service
c. 5000 hours of service
d. After 2,500 hours of service

g. Which of the following documents referenced in API 510

addresses recommended inspection practices for pressure
vessels?

a. API 620
b. API 572
c. API Std 526
d. All of the above

10. After completion of alterations a pressure test

a. Normally required

b. Subject to approval of the jurisdiction ( where

applicable) appropriate NDE shall be required where
pressure test is not performed

c. Substituting NDE procedure for a pressure test after

an alteration ay be done only after consulting a
pressure vessel engineer experienced in pressure
vessel design and the authorized pressure vessel
inspector have been consulted
d. All of above
14. Authorization for which of the following approval from pressure
vessel engineer is not mandatory

a. Repairs for vessels that comply with sec VIII Div 1

b. Alterations for vessels that comply with sec VIII Div 1
c. Repairs for vessels that comply with sec VIII Div 2
d. Alternations for vessels that comply with sec VIII Div 2

15. In WPS PQR documentation, the essential, supplementary

essential and Non-essential variables (EV, SEV, NEV) shall be
addressed in these documents. Which document shall address
which of the variables.

a. All EVs / SEVs and NEV s shall be addressed in both WPS

and PQR

b. Only EV sand SEVs shall be addressed in both PQR and

WPS documents

c. PQR shall address all EVs and SEVs while WPS shall
record all EV s / SEV sand NEVs

d. WPS shall address EV sand SEVs while PQR must record

all EVs / SEVs and NEVs

16. Corrosion and minimum thickness evaluation may be conducted

by?

a. Use of Magnetic particle examination

b. Ultri'lsonic testing
c. Profile radiography
d . 0 n ')I "b" and "e"

13
20. Calculate the remaining life of a vessel given the following data:
Actual thickness = 0.955 inch Minimum thickness required =
0.755 inch Thickness at pervious inspection 5 years prior to
present inspection = 1.025 inch

a. 20 years
b. 14 years
c. 28 years

d. Any of the above depending upon ambient conditions

21. The period between internal or on-stream inspections shall not

exceed?

a. One half of the remaining life of the vessel (based on

corrosion rate)
b. 10 years

c. The lesser of "a" and "b"

d. In cases where the safe working life is estimated to be

less than 4 years the inspection interval may be the full
remaining safe operating life up to a maximum of 2
years
e. "c" and "d" above

22. After completion or repairs a pressure test

a. Must always be conducted

b. Shall be applied if the authorized pressure vessel

c. Must never be conducted

d. Only "a' and "b" above

I'
I J
26. After completion of alterations a pressure test is:

a. Normally required

b. Subject to approval of the jurisdiction (where

applicable) appropriate NDE shall be required where
pressure test is not performed
c. Substituting NDE procedure for a pressure test after
an alteration ay be done only after consulting a
pressure vessel engineer experienced in pressure
vessel design and the authorized pressure vessel
inspector have been consulted
d. All of the above

27. Which of the following are typical conditions found on the

external surfaces of vessels?

a. Blistering

b. Caustic embrittlement
c. CUI
d. Only "b" and "cfT
above

28. The external surfaces of vessels should be examined not only

for corrosion but also for:

a. leaks
b. Cracks
c. Buckles
d. All of the above
33. Which of the following may be classified as "internals" of
vessels?

a. Catalyst bed supports

b. Cyclone entry nozzles
c. Demister pads
d. "an and "c"

34. If any setting is noticed on a vessel, which of the following

should be done?

a. Conduct RT after 48 hours of observing the defective

condition
b. Nozzles and adjacent shell areas should be inspected for
distortion and cracking
c. Use acoustic emission monitoring
d. All of the above

35. Which of the following are types of NDT methods?

a. Ultrasonic testing
b. Radiographic testing
c. Hammer testing
d. Both "a" and "b"

36. Which of the following are common reasons for)n- service of

shutdown inspection?

a. To determine the physical condition of he equipment

c. none of the above

d. ";]" and "b" above

'i9
5. Repair Organization: According to API 510 is:

a. Holder of ASME certificate & appropriate code symbol

sta m p.
b. Owner-user
c. Contractor under contract with owner-user
d. Any of above

6. For all repairs and alterations under API SiD, the ultimate
responsibility rests with:
a. Owner user
b. API Committee
c. API-SiD Inspector
d. Jurisdiction authority

7. Identify incorrect statement from following:

a. A welder performing procedure test is also qualified in that

position.
b. Supplementary essential variables become essential
variables when impact test is specified.
c. For procedure qualification, the test can be performed in
any position as the position is not essential variable for
procedure qualification.
d. None of above.

8. Following two combinations of nozzle pipe dia and shell thickness

are given of reinforcement .. Case 1: vessel wall thk = 112 " and
nozzle size NPS 3, Case 2 vessel wall thk = % " Nozzle size NPS
2 Y2 According to ASME Sec. VIII reinforcement requirement for
which of above nozzles by should be verified by calculations?

a. For both cases

b. For none
c. Calculations required for 1 but not for 2
d. Calculations required for 2 and not for 1

9. Normally r minimum thic:knpss evaluation mC'lY hp. C()nrlll,tpt! hv?

a. Use of a external micrometer
b. Ultrasonic testing
c. Vernier callipers
d. None of <Jbove

21
16. For calculating reinforcement pad requirements for given Design
Pressure, which of the following statement is applicable:

a. Credit can be taken for extra metal in shell

b. Credit can be taken for extra metal in nozzle
c. a and b above are true
d. None of above

17. Choose correct Pneumatic test pressure from given options for a
vessel with following data:
Design Pr = 160 psi,
Design temp= 6750 F
M.O.C - SA 537 ct. 1
Allow stress (Ambient) = 20000 psi
Allow stress (6750F) = 19200 psi

a. 176.0 psig
b. 215.6 psig
c. 183.3 psig
d. none of above

18. You are planning for the Hydro-test of a complete vessel with
Hydro test pressure 40Kg/cm2g. The calibrated test gauges
available with you are 0-50 Kg/cm2g, 0-100 Kg/cm2g, 1-150
2
Kg/cm g and 0-200 Kg/cm2g. Which two gauges are acceptable
for this test?

a. 0-50 Kg/cm2g and 0-100 Kg/cm2g

b. 0-100 Kg/cm2g and 0-200 Kg/cm2g
c. 0-50 Kg/cm2g and 0-200 Kg/cm2g
d. 0-100 Kg/cm2g and 0-150 Kg/cm2g

19. You are checking a plate received for the pressure vessel
fabrication. What will be your action plan?

a. Correlate test certificate with applicable specification

b. Correlate heat marks and identification with the actual
plate identification
c. Visuai (.H1d ulmerlsiolldi IllspectiUrI
d. All of the above are nE::.cessary
action before accepting the
plate.
20. Qualification of welding procedure as per Section IX is required:
a. For manual welding process
b. For machine welding process
c. For semi automatic welding process
d. For all of the above process
21. Erosion would normally be seen at:
a. Drain nozzles
b. Saddle wear plates
c. Impingement plates
d. a. and c.

22. Temper embrittlement is:

a. Brittleness due to low temperature operation

b. Brittleness due to Hydrogen Sulphide attack at high
temperatures (exceeding 700 deg. F)
c. Loss of ductility due to incorrect PWHT and High
temperature service
d. None of above.

23. Part MAWP for lower dished head in Vertical vessel will
generally be:

a. Lower than top head

b. Lower than shell
c. Higher than both shell and top head
d. Same as both top head and shell

24. Choose correct statement - Allowable External pressure

for a vessel:

a. Will depend on weld joint efficiency (E)

b. Depends on Vessel temperature
c. Depends on Internal Corrosion allowance
d. Both band c

25. PWHT is required for vessels containing products, classified

as "lethal" or a thickness exceeding:

a. 1.0 inch
b. 0 .5 inch
c. 0.0 inch
d. 1.<; inch
10. Which of the following statements is true?

a. All defects are not discontinuities

b. All discontinuities are defects
c. Discontinuities are rejectable defects
d. Defects are rejectable discontinuities

11. A Pressure Vessel is being designed for 0.85 joint efficiency with
full penetration welds. RT requirement for such vessel is

a. Nil
b. Spot
c. 100 0/0

d. Joints radiography

12. Post weld heat treatment is carried out

a. To increase hardness
b. To increase tensile strength
c. To release locked-up stresses in the weld
d. None of above.
13. If all other conditions remain same the design thickness of which
dished end (torispherical, hemispherical, ellipsoidal) will be
maximum?

a. Torispherical
b. Hemispherical
c. Ellipsoidal
d. All have same thickness

14. In A 516 Gr 70 specification the letter A indicates:

a. That material is ASME material. (A for ASME)

b. That material is Ferrous material
c. That material is Non-Ferrous material
d. None of the above

15. Any thickness-offset within the allowable tolerance shall be

pluviJeJ d tuper ~idnsjtiLln vF;

a. 3 to 1 m in.
b. 4 to 1 min.
c. 3 to 2 min.
d. All of the above
SET -C
API 510 Preparatory Course

1. Which of the following are excluded from the scope of application

of API 510?

a. Pressure vessels on movable structures covered by other

jurisdictional regulations
b. All classes of containers listed for exemption from
construction in ASMESection VIII Div. 1
c. Pressure vessels which do not exceed volume of the five
cubic feet and pressure of 250 psi
d. All of the above

2. During Hydrostatic testing, to avoid risk of brittle fracture, which

of the following action may be taken?

a. Recalculate test pressure based on material stress at test

temperature
b. Carry out test at temperature more 30°F above MDMT
c. The test area is cordoned off and out of bounds for non-
essential personnel
d. None of the above

3. Which of the following are essential elements of a Quality control

system of a repair organization?

a. Organisational authority and responsibility

b. Statements about Working (Inspection/repair)Procedures
and their documentation
c. Statement of controls to ensure Quality conformance
d. All of the above

4. According to API 510, authorized inspection agency is:

a. jUrisdictIOn organization
b. Inspection organisation of Insurance company which under
writes insurance of pressure vessels
c. Inspection organization of owner-user
d. Any of abovf~
29. Erosion would normally be exhibited at:

a. Wear plates on saddles

a. Baffle plates
b. Impingement plates
c. All of the above except "a"

30. How is hammer testing utilized?

a. As a sLJpplementto visual inspection
b. To be confirmed by subsequent NDT
c. None of above
d. Only "b" and "a" above

31. Shells of vessels adjacent to inlet impingement plates are

susceptible to

a. Stress-corrosion cracking
b. Erosion
c. Hydrogen embrittlement
d. Any of the above depending upon ambient conditions

32. Which of the following are common reasons for in- service of
shutdown inspection:

a. To determine the physical condition of he equipment

h. To determine the type, rate and causes of deterioration
c. (,one of the above
d. "alf and "b" above
23. Which of the following changes on a pressure vessel could be
termed as an alteration?

a. Addition of a reinforced nozzle of size equal to an

existing nozzle
b. Addition of a nozzle not requiring reinforcement
c. Any change that effect the pressure containing
capacity of the vessel beyond the scope of items
described in existing data reports
d. All of the above
e. Only "b" and "c"

24. If the bolt shank corrosion is anticipated for foundation bolts,

what testing methods are recommended?

a. Tensile testing of equivalent sized rivets

b. Hammer testing
c. RT at an angle to the shank axis
d. All of the above

25. Which of the following documents referenced in API 510

addresses recommended inspection practices for pressure
vessels?

a. API 620
b. API Rpcomnwnded practice 572
c. API Std 526
d. All of the above

1';
17. Which of the following is / are to be undertaken in case the
ownership or location of vessel are changed

a. The vessel shall be internally inspected before it is re-used

b. The vessel shall externally inspected before it is re-used.
c. The allowable conditions of service shall be established and
the next period of inspection shall be established for the new
service.
d. All of the above

18. Which of the following are essential elements of a Quality control

system of a repair organization?

a. Statement of authority and responsibility

b. Welding procedures

c. The relationship of the QC manager with the owner

d. All of the above
e. Only "a" and "b" above

19. Welders and welding procedures shall be qualified to the

requirement of

a. ASME Section VIII Div. 1

b. ASME Section V
c. ASME Section IX
d. None of the above
11. Materials used for making repair by welding in carbon steel
vessels shall have the following limitations?

a. They shall meet the requirements stipulated I NACE

MR 0175
b. The carbon content shall not be over 0.350/0
c. Welding repair shall be done by using only the GTAW
process
d. All of the above

12. Corrosion under insulation (CUI) due to environmental factors

like humidity, moisture, will be more pronounced at
temperature

a. Below 250F
b. 250F to 2500F

c. More than 2500

d. Other factors being same corrosion in above
temperature ranges will be same minimize.

13. During Hydrostatic testing, risk of brittle fracture, which of the

following action may be taken

a. Replace Hydro testing by pneumatic testing

h. Rpc:alclJlatp. tp,;t pr:~ssure based on matf:;(al stress at
fvl D MT

c. Carry out test at temperature more 30°F above MDMT

d. None of the above
a. 20 years
b. 14 years
c. 28 years
d. None of the above

6. The period between the two consecutive internal (or on-

stream) inspections shall not exceed?

a. One half of the remaining life of the vessel (based on

corrosion rate)
b. 10 years
c. cases where the safe working life is estimated to be
less than 4 years the inspection interval may be the
full remaining safe operating life up to a maximum of
2 years
d. The least of above

7. After completion or repairs, a pressure test

a. Must always be conducted

b. Shall be applied if the authorized pressure vessel
inspector believes that one is necessary
c. Must never be conducted
d. Shall be conducted only if repair is done on pressure
parts.

8. If probable corrosion rates can not be determined, on stream

determinations shall be made after .'lppmximately
21. An ellipsoidal head has an internal diameter of 76 inches and
a depth of 21 inches (including a straight face of 2 inches).
What should its spherical radius be for the crown portion?

a. 76.0 inches
b. 38.0 inches
c. 68.4 inches
d. 60.8 inch

SET - B
API-510 Preparatory Course

1. Re-rating may be done after which of the following

requirements are met?

a. Calculations from either the manufacturer or an

owner-use pressure vessel engineer experienced in
pressure vessel design, fabrication or inspection shall
justify the re-rating.
b. The re-rating is in accordance with the construction
code to which the pressure vessel was originally built
or by computations that are determined using the
appropriate formulae in the latest edition of the
ASME Code
c. Current inspection records verify that the pressure
vessel is satisfactory for the proposed service
conditions eHlU Lhc.:lc (fle CUI:USiUfl c:dlu,VdlIce plu\/ideJ
is adequate.
d. /\11of the d bove
14. Double wall Double image technique is used for the
radiography of:

a. Plate welds
b. Tubular products with outer diameter up to 3.5 in
c. Large pipes with outer diameter 200 mm and above
d. Heavy castings

15. Visual check shall be carried out.

a. Before welding
b. During welding
c. After welding.
d. At all the above stages

16. Which of the following ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code
sections are referenced in API SiD?

a. ASME Section V
b. ASME Section VIII Div 1
c. ASME Section IX
d. All of above

17. Corrosion and minimum thickness evaluation may be

conducted by?

a. Use of a external micrometer

b. Ultrasonic test
c. All of the above
d. None of above
b. accepted, as it is not a major defect
c. rejected, as the visual inspection using magnifier shows
critical indication
d. rejected, as the dimensions shown by the indication is
above acceptance standards

8. A lead letter of B is used in radiography in order to know the

scatter in well within the limits

a. By keeping the letter B on source side and image of B on

film shall be lighter than the background
b. By keeping the letter B on source side and image of B on
film shall be similar or darker than the background
c. By keeping the letter B on film side and image of B on
film shall be similar or darker than the background
d. By keeping the letter B on film side and image of B on
film shall be lighter than the background

9. For instrument calibration in Ultrasonic Testing, amplitude

control linearity forms an important factor. The allowable
tolerance for amplitude height linearity (of the nominal
amplitude ratio) is:

a. + 5 %
b. + 10 %
c:. +, 15 %
d. + 20 cia
3. Name plate of a certain pressure vessel has name plate
stamping as " RT 3 " for the radiography, All Welds are type 1
welds.

Vessel dia. = 72 inch 1.0.

M.O. C = SA 515 gr 70 Design temp = 60°F
Allowable stress at design temp = 20,000 psi

If shell Thickness = 5/8" and C. A = 1/8" The MAWP for the

vessel shell will be

a. 234 psi
b. 168 psi
c. 256 psi
d. 286psi

4. Following two combinations of nozzle pipe dia and shell thickness

are given of reinforcement. Case 1: vessel wall thk = V2 " and
nozzle size NPS 3, Case 2 vessel wall thk = % " Nozzle size NPS
2. According to ASME Sec. VIII Div. 1, the reinforcement
requirement for which of above nozzles by should be verified by
calculations
a. For both cases
b. For none

c. Calculations required for 1 but not for 2

d. Calculations required for 2 and not for 1

5. Which of the following changes on a pressure vessel could be

termed as an alteration?

2
SET-D
API 510 Preparatory Course
1. For safe entry in pressure vessels which of the following
document is adopted in the API-510 body of knowledge?

a. API - 2015
b. API - 576
c. IRE - Chap II
d. ASME- Sec. V

2. A piping & valve system is described as follows: "closure of a

line, duct, or pipe by closing and locking two in-line valves and
by opening and locking a drain or vent valve in the line between
the closed valves" This is designated in API documents as:

a. Double valve single drain "arrangement

b. "On-off" arrangement
c. "Double block and bleed" arrangement
d. "Double in single out" arrangement

3. An individual stationed outside one or more permit spaces who

monitors the authorized entrants and orders the authorized
entrants to evacuate the permit space under unsafe conditions.
This individual is referred as:

a. Supervisor
b. A qualified person
c. An attendant
d. None of above

4. HCI is more harmful in refining sour crudes because:

a. In presence of H2S, corrosion of iron by HCI

becomes cyclic reaction regenerating HCI

b. HCLforms galvanic cell which causes corrosion

cracking

c. HCI causes loss of ductility of steel.

d. None of the Above

2'.-.
- "J
b. The remaining life of pressure relief device.
c. The spring coil diameter.
d. The body thickness.

10. Where (typically) are balanced safety relief valves used in

refineries?

a. For pressure control and bypass

b. On steam boiler drums and super heaters
c. When the discharge from the valves must be piped to
remote points
d. All of the above

11. Which of the following are possible reasons for improper

performance of valves?

a. Corrosion
b. Damaged seating surfaces
c. Failed springs
d. All of the above

12. Which of the following tests must be conducted on a valve as

soon as it has been removed out of a system:

a. Visual Inspection
b. Hydrotesting of valve body
c. Radiographic testing
d. Check set-pressure and leak tightness

13. Which of the following best describes a safety relief valve?

a. A spring - loaded pressure relieving device that is popped

open by enough static pressure in the huddling chamber
and kinetic energy of the gas or vapour to overcome the
spring force on the disc as it is lifted to provide full opening
and allow minimal overpressure

h. A sprinq - In.:1rfprl pn:>~c.ure "plif~vinlJ \/.l!VP th;ltlctS .:1<),1

safety valve when lIsed in gas or vapour service and as a
relief valve when used in liquid service.

c. A spring - loaded pressure relie'l!!:g device for liquid

service that begins to open when the inlet pn~ssure

2'
c. 100 ohms
d. none of the above

19. For vessels which are supported on concrete saddles and

working in an area where the humidity is high which areas on
them are typically susceptible to external corrosion?

a. At the anchor bolts in the foundation

b. At the Points of contact of the metal surface with the
concrete
c. All of the above
d. None of the above

20. H2S is in sour crude is more harmful in presence of:

a. Oxygen
b. Water (i.e. Wet H2S)
c. Sulphur
d. 'a' and 'c' above

21. The leak tightness of the relief valves is tested on the test block
at a pressure equal to:

a. Same as set pressure

b. 90°10 of the set pressure
c. Same as reseat pressure
d. None of the above

22. During Hydrostatic testing, risk of brittle fracture, which of the

following action may be taken

a. Replace Hydro testing by pneumatic testing

b. Recalculate test pressure based on material stress at
MDMT
c. Carry out test at temperature more 30°F above MDMT
d. None of the above

23. Which of the following classifications of heat exchangers would

hlvP' I /-h Ihp.s inr()r~nri1tpd into it?

a. Ai.:Stype
b. BEMtype
c. AEP type
d. CFU tYr~

23
29. Repair Organization: According to API 510 is

a. Holder of ASME certificate & appropriate code symbol

stamp
b. Owner-user
c. Contractor under contract with owner-user
d. Any of above

30. For corrosion area of considerable size; thickness averaging along

most critical element shall not exceed following length for 72" ID
vessel.

a. 20 inches
b. 40 inches
c. 30 inches
d. None of above

31. According to API 510 for ellipsoidal head, crown portion thickness
recalculation:

a. Crown can be taken as spherical portion of radius K1 x D

b. K1 depends on D/2h ratio
c. Crown lies within concentric circle of 80% shell diameter
d. All of above

32. For non-continuous corrosive service with remaining life 25 years,

external inspection shall be performed after:

a. 10 years
b. 12.5 years
c. 5 years
d. None of above

33. Inspection records shall have following information

a. Design & Construction records (permanent)

b. Running inspection records
c. Repair and alteration records
rl /\11 nf C'lhnve

34. According to API-510, restoration by welding of parent metal

loss may be made by usin:] by elcctrod:s hlJving tensiles
strp.ngth:

31
39. The nondestructive examination method to be used for a
particular inspection should be determined by the:

a. availability of certified NDEexaminers.

b. length of time since the last inspection.
c. age of the component to be inspected.
d. type, location, and orientation of the expected flaws.

40. Which of the following statements is true?

a. All defects are not discontinuities.
b. All discontinuities are defects.
c. Discontinuities are rejectable defects.
d. Defects are rejectable discontinuities.

41. Which of the following search unit would contain the thinnest
quartz crystal?
a. A 1 megahertz search unit
b. A 5 megahertz search unit
c. A 15 megahertz search unit
d. A 25 megahertz search unit

42. Which of the following can be magnetized?

a. Iron
b. Nickel
c. Cobalt
d. All of the above

43. Why are magnetic particles available in different colors?

a. For color contrast with the part surface.
b. To enhance the detection of indications.
c. Both a and b.
d. Different colors are used with different magnetic flux values.

44. Visual testing is a

a. Nondestructive testing techniques applicable for surface and

internal discontinuities
b. l\Jondestructive testiny techniques diJplicabie for surface
discontinuities only.
c. Destructive testing techniques applicable for surface and
interndl discontinuities.
d. Destructive testing techniques applicable for internal
discontinuitic:s only.

'3
45. Incase of horizontal insulated vessel most likely location of CUI
will be:

a. Under belly areas

b. At the top in lengthwise area
c. In 3 O'clock and 9 o'clock position
d. Uniformly all over

46. The rate of erosion varies as:

a. Square of fluid velocity

b. Linearly with velocity
c. Varies as cube of velocity
d. Varies as square root of velocity

47. For testing relief valves for set pressure:

a. Only air shall be used

b. Only water shall be used
c. The combination may be used
d. Only nitrogen shall be used irrespective of service condition

48. Cracks and laminations look similar from surface however,

generally:
a. Cracks run normal to vessels surfaces
b. Lamination runs slant or parallel to surface
c. a and b above
d. None of above
49. Visual Testing can detect the following weld discontinuities.

a. Undercut
b. Crater crack
c. Excessive reinforcement
d. Allof the above

50. What probe would be chosen to detect the smallest defect if

steel sperimen with <l velocity 6 x lOG rnml'~pr. is to hp.
.
insoected?
a. 2 MHz
b. 10 !\1Hz
c. 5 MHz
d. 6 ~;lHz
a. Same as parent material
b. Higher than parent material
c. Lower than parent material
d. All of the above

35. For all repairs and alterations under API 510, the ultimate
responsibility rests with

a. Owner user
b. API Committee
c. API-510 Inspector
d. Jurisdiction authority

36. "Hot tapping" means

a. Light tapping of vessel by ball point hammer to find leakages

when the vessel is operating at working temperature.
b. Cutting the threads in the help of tap and die when material
hot so as to make the cutting of threads easier
c. Act of providing new tapping connection while the vessel is in
operation
d. Tapping hot water samples from process plants for analysis
purpose

37. Which of the following is an advantage of magnetic particle

testing over penetrant testing?

a. can detect surface discontinuities with foreign material

imbedded in them
b. It is faster on individual parts
c. It can detect near-surface discontinuities
d. All of the above'

38. In an A-scan presentation, the amplitude of vertical indications

on the screen represents the

d. AillUUllt uP u,tJd::'Ullic ::'UUII,j t:::11t:::IYI Idull,;"g i..) the searc;.

unit
b. Distance traveled by the search unit
c. Thickness of material being tested
d. Elapsedtime since the ultrasonic pulse was generated

','I
24. If any setting is noticed on a vessel, which of the following
should be done:

a. Conduct RT after 48 hours of observing the defective

condition

b. Nozzles and adjacent shell areas should be inspected for

distortion and cracking
c. Use acoustic emission monitoring
d. All of the above

25. Which of the following are typical deterioration that can take
place on the external surfaces of vessels?

a. CUI
b. Caustic embrittlement
c. Erosion
d. All of the above

26. The external surfaces of vessels should be examined not only for
corrosion but also for:

a. Leaks
b. Cracks
c. Buckles
d. All of the above

27. Which of the following are commonly used techniques of surface

preparation for inspection:
a. Wire brushing
b. Sand - blasting
c. High pressure water blasting
d. All of the above

28. According to API 510, authorized inspection agency is:

a. Jurisdiction organization
b. Insurance company which under writes insuraLce of
pressure vessels
c. Inspection organization of owner-user
d. Any of above
reaches set pressure. Overcomesthe spring force and
begins to lift the disc off the seat and that continues to
open as inlet pressure and the lift of the disc increase
allowing the flow
of the liquid to increase

d. All of the above

14. Which of the following are reasons for inspection of pressure

relieving devices:

a. To protect personnel and equipment

b.To determine tf1econdition of a device
c. To evaluate inspection frequency
d. All of the above

15. Which of the following could cause flutter/chatter in valves?

a. Improper material of construction

b. Overpressure
c. Erosion
d. Large length piping to the valve inlet from the vessel
16. API 576 does not address:

a. Valve testing on test benches in shop

b. Application of rupture discs
c. Training requirements for mechanics involved in
inspection and repair of pressure relieving devices
d. All of the above

17. If any settling is noticed on a vessel, which of the following

should be done:

a. Conduct RT after48 hours of observing the defective

condition
b. Nozzles and adjacent shell areas should be inspected for
distortion and cracking
c. Use acoustic f~missionmonitoring
d. Ail of Lhe duuve

18. Recommended resistance of electrical grounding connections is:

a. 5 ohms
b. SO ohfr;
5. "In austenitic stainless steels, in presence of chlorides
spontaneous failure may occur under combined action of
corrosion and tensile stress" What type of phenomenon is
described by this statement:

a. Sensitization of stainless steel

b. Stress corrosion cracking
c. Intergranular corrosion of stainless steels
d. Chromium-decay of stainless steels.

6. Sour crude is more corrosive than sweet crude because

a. Sour crude is heavier than is sweet crude

b. Sweet crude has more waxing tendency (compared
to sour crude) which forms protective layer on
metallic surfaces hence sweet crudes are less
corrosive.
c. Sour crude contains high content H2S and sulpher
compared to sweet crude which lead to several types
of corrosion
d. None of the above.

7. The nondestructive examination method to be used for a

particular inspection should be determined by the:

a. Availability of certified NDEexaminers

b. Length of time since the last inspection
c. Age of the component to be inspected
d. Type, location, and orientation of the expected flaws

8. In planning for an internal inspection of a vessel that has acidic

corrodents, what type of corrosion would you expect to find on
the vessel shell from inside,

a. Hydrogen blistering in the vapor space

b. Uniform corrosion of vessel wall
c. Erosion of vessel walls.
d. None of above.

g. The principal reason for inspecting a pressure relief device is to

determine:

a. Condition of pressure relief device dnd if it is fUilctioning

properly

,J3
51. Austenitic 5.5. is considered as good Cryogenic material because:
a. Because of its good corrosion resistance
b. Because of its good tensile Strength
c. Because of its good yield Strength
d. Because of its good impact Strength

SET-E
API 510 Preparatory Course

1. For repairs on vessel walls, which have been subjected to

PWHTas a code requirement and made of PI or P3 Steels,
(for which exemptions exist in ASMESec. VIII Div I code,)
which of the following options may be adopted?

a. Conduct RT after 48 hours of completion of all hot work

b. Pre- heat to al least 300°F as an alternative to PWHT
after repair
c. Use acoustic emission monitoring
d. Ultrasonic testing

2. HCI is more corrosive in refining sour crudes because:

a. In presence of H2S, corrosion of iron by HcI becomes

cyclic reaction regenerating Hcl.
b. HcI liberates chlorine in presence of sulphur which
causes stress corrosion cracking
c. HcI liberates Hydrogen in presence of sulphur
causing Hydrogen embrittlement.
d. None of the above

2. "In austenitic stainless st;'~els, in presence of chlorides

spontaneous failure may occur under combined action of
corrosion and tensile stress" What type of phenomenon is
described by this statement?

a. Sensitization of stainless steel?

b. Stress corrosion cracking
c. Intergranular corrosion of stainless steels
d. Chrornium-decJY of stainless steels
8. SA 516 Gr 70 specification the number 70 indicates:

a. Minimum yield strength

b. Minimum ultimate tensile strength
c. Minimum % elongation
d. None of the above

9. Which of the following are reasons for inspection of

pressure - relieving devices:

a. To protect personnel and equipment

b. To determine the condition of a device
c. To evaluate inspection frequency
d. All of the above

10. Shells of vessels adjacent to inlet impingement plates are

susceptible to:

a. Stress-corrosion cracking
b. Erosion
c. Hydrogen embrittlement
d. Any of the above depending upon ambient conditions

11. H2Sis in sour crude is more harmful in presence of:

a. Oxygen
b. Water (i.e. Wet H2S)
c. Sulphur
d. 'a' and 'c' above

12. The leak tightness of the relief valves is tested on the test
block at a pressure equal to:

a. Same as set pressure

b. 90% of the set pressure
c. Same as reseat pressure
d. None of the above

13. VVhich'itatement is correct?

a. ASMESection II B deals with consumables for welding

b. ASME Section V gives acceptance stand<Jrds for NDT
f:xHllirat ions

17
19. Procedure Qualification Record is a document which can be
revised time to time?

a. True
b. False
c. Depends on company policy
d. Depends on client of the company

20. Which of the following are areas on pressure vessel which

are susceptible to CUI?

a. All the area which is below insulation

b. Insulated areas below steam vents
c. Insulated piping exposed to cooling tower mist
d. "b" and "c" above

21. Calculate the remaining life of a vessel subjected to

unoform rate of corrosion given the following data: Actual
thickness = 0.955 inch, Minimum thickness required =
0.755 inch Thickness at pervious inspection 5 years prior
to present inspection = 1.025 inch

a. 20 years
b. 14 years
c. 28 years
d. None of the above

22. Corrosion under insulation (CUI) due to environmental

factors like humidity, moisture, will be more pronounced at
temperature:

a. 25°F to 250°F
b. More than 250°F
c. Other factors being same corrosion in above
temperature ranges will be same
d. None of above
23. Vessel MAWPfor vertical vessel is measured at:

d. I"OJ) JrI0~[ J-lVilll VI ve~~e1

b. Bottom most point of vessel
c. At the mid point between top & bottom
d. None of above

'1
c. Carry out both Hydro-testing and Pneumatic Testing in
lieu of the PWHT
d. None of above would be acceptable solution
28. Double wall Single image technique is used for the
radiography of:
a. Plate welds
b. Tubular products with outer diameter more than 3.5
inch.
c. Heavy castings
d. None of above

29. Which of the following is a description of an "indication"?

a. A response or evidence resulting from the application of

a nondestructive evaluation technique
b. A defect if it is of size greater than 3 mm
c. The light which is emitted from a signal
d. All of the above

30. Welders carrying out repair/alteration according to API 510

shall be qualified according to:
a. API 1104 welding qualification code
b. ASME Sec. IX code
c. Anyone of a or b above
d. None of a or b above

31. Which of the following represent grouping of weld-metals

in ASME IX?
a. P- Nos
b. F- Nos
c. S- Nos
d. A- Nos

32. A PQRwas f/ualified in 5G position using a new welder. But

production welding is to be done in 2G position. Which of
the following are applicable as a minimum?

,1,
'
position.
.
Roth I1rorprl, jrP ~nrl WpldPr" c:h;oll! h~~ ,-c_-'111;1Iifipo in ?G

b. The qualified procedure can be used ,only welder needs

to he re-qualified
c. The welder is qualified, but th;3 proc:edure needs re..
qualification

+1
c. Thickness of crown shall be same as knuckle thickness
d. None of the above.

37. For instrument calibration ( check Instrument response to

energy input in dB) in Ultrasonic Testing dB , amplitude
control linearity forms an important factor. The allowable
tolerance for amplitude height linearity (of the nominal
amplitude ratio) is:

a. + 5 %

b. + 10 %
c. + 15 %
d. + 20 %

38. Which of the following ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel

Code sections are referenced in API 510?

a. ASME Section V
b. ASME Section VIII
c. ASME Section IX
d. All of above

39. Which of the following is / are to be undertaken in case the

Service conditions of vessel are changed?

a. The vessel shall be hydro tested only.

b. The vessel shall be internally and externally inspected
before it is re-used.
c. The allowable conditions (MAWP, Temp. rating) for new
service shall be established and the next period of
inspection shall be established for the new service.
d. None of above

40. The period between External inspections for vessels

(remaining life > 4 years) shall not exceed which of
following:

a. Smaller of: One half of the remaining life of the vessel

anrl 1n yen.s
b. 5 years
c. The lesser of "all and "b"
d. The higher of a. and b.
a. AES type
b. BEMtype
c. AEPtype
d. CFUtype

46. Which of the following are typical conditions found on the

external surfaces of vessels?

a. Hydrogen Blistering
b. Hydrogen embrittlement
c. CUI
d. All of the above

47. The external surfaces of vessels should be examined for:

a. CUI
b. settlement
c. distortions
d. All of the above

48. Which of the following are types of NDT methods?

a. Ultrasonic testing
b. Radiographic testing
c. Hammer testing
d. All of the above

49. How many tube sheets would a heat exchanger have which
incorporates U-tubes in it?

a. One
b. Two
c. Three
d. None of the above

50. Scheduling of refinery shutdowns for maintenance or

inspection is usually arranged through the coll<lboration of:

b. ~vlaintenancegroup
c. Inspection group
d. All of the above

,-
i' ~J
SET -F
API 510 Preparatory Course
1. An ellipsoidal head has an internal diameter of 76 inches and
depth of 21 inches (including a straight face dimension of 2
inches). What should its spherical (crown) radius be?

a. 76.9 inches
b. 15.6 inches
c. 68.4 inches
d. all of the above
,

2. A lead letter of B is kept between cassette and film in order to

know:

a. The scatter in well within the Iimits- When B is darker

b. The scatter isn well within the Iimits- When B is lighter
c. For the purpose of measuring the intensification factor
d. As standard marking on radiographs.

3. Which of the following penetrant system is generally considered

least sensitive?

a. Water-washable
b. Solvent removable
c. All equally sensitive
d. Post-emulsification
4. Which of the following is an advantage of magnetic particle
testing over penetrant testing?

a. It can detect surface discontinuities with foreign material.

b. Imbedded in them
c. It is faster on individual parts.
d. It can detect near-surface discontinuities.
e. All of the above.

5. Which of the following types of discontinuities is not normally

JeLeLu::J by I dJiU~t djJh y?
a. Cracks
b. Incomplete penetration
c. L.aminations
d. Slag

.,~
'10
41. Materials used for making repair by welding in carbon steel
vessels shall have the following limitations?

a. They shall meet the requirements stipulated in NACE

MR 0175
b. The carbon content shall not be over 0.350/0
c. The Carbon Equivalent shall not be over 0.350/0
d. All of the above

42. For carrying out temper - bead welding technique in lieu of

PWHT, which of the following is applicable?

a. The weld shall be deposited by GTAW process, with

Argon gas shielding
b. Weld metal shall be deposited by SMAW process using
low-Hydrogen electrodes
c. After depositing each layers of the weld, The weld shall
be DP checked
d. None of the above

43. The period between internal or on-stream inspections shall

not exceed?

a. One half of the remaining life of the vessel (based on

corrosion rate)
b. 10 years

c. In cases where the safe working life is estimated to be

less than 4 years the inspection interval may be the full
remaining safe operating life up to a maximum of 2
years
d. Least of all above

44. If rivet shank corrosion is anticipated for riveted vessels

what testing methods are recommended?

a. Tensile testing of equivalent sized revets

b. Hammer testing
c. ;ZT.Jt illl <Jli~:2 (.0 l:-.c 5:1",l1k (~Ld::;
d. Gnly "b" and "elf

45. Which of the following classifications of heat exchangers

would have U-tubes incorporated into it?
d. Both procedure and welder need not be re-qualified.

33. For a vessel, estimated remaining life is estimated as 7

years from now, next planned inspection shall not be later
than:

a. 7 Years
b. 3.5 Years
c. 5 Years
d. 6 Years

34. Calculate the remaining life and external insp. interval of a

vessel given the following data:
Actual thickness = 0.955 inch
Minimum thickness required = 0.755 inch
Thickness at previous inspection 5 years prior to present
inspection = 1.025 inch
a. 20 years, 10 years
b. 14 years,5years
c. 28 years, 10 years
d. None of the above

35. ASME Sec VIII Div. 1 specifies different acceptance level

for weld reinforcement, which of the following statements
are true in your opinion:
a. Permitted reinforcement for long. seems is higher than
circ. seems
b. Permitted reinforcement for long. seems is lower than
circ. seems
c. Permitted reinforcement for long. seems is same as
circ. seems
d. Permitted reinforcement does not depend on location of
seems.

36. While deciding the governing thickness for crown portion

for corroded 2: 1 ellipsoidal head, API 510 stipulates that &
crown thickness shall be calculated:

a. According to relevant eliipsoidal djshed head formula

b. According to code formula for spherical head';"vith :,ead
radills ecr Ijl to 0 9 DI \vhere f) IS sheil di21 r leer,

,2
24. Hot tapping is best described by statement:

a. It is technique of preheating the part of vessel to

specified temperature and tapping with lIb. rainded
hammer to detect wall thinning
b. It is technique of providing a tapping connection while
pipe system is in operation
c. It is technique of fixing a water tap on hot water lines
for use during winter
d. It is act of using the tap and die for threading when the
part is hot

25. "CUI" is API 510 means:

a. Corrosion under inspection

b. Components under inspection
c. Corrosion under investigation
d. Corrosion under insulation

26. Inspection records contain the following information for a

particular thickness measurement location (TML) on a
dished head.(Thickness in inches)

Thickness Year
0.500 0
0.425 5
0.400 10

On the basis of the information above, the long-term

corrosion rate for the location is:
a. 1 V2 mils per year
b. 5 mils per year
c. 10 mils per year
d. 100 mils per year

27. A certain Weld in vessel (P1 material with exemptions in

ASME -VIII-Div. 1) was required to have PWHT initially
according to code requirement. After 10 years when
repaired by welding is to be carried out. Performing PWHT
is found to be impracticable. What solutIon (according to
API-S10) would you offer?

a. PWHT rnlY be (>xempted, if proper I\JDf is carried out

b. Carry out Ternper-be,ld welding as on dlternatlve PWHT.

,f)
c. PWHT can be carried out after Hydro test as a good
engineering practice
d. Lower the Carbon content, better the weldability

14. The symbol which indicates ASME code stamping for

vessels manufactured to ASME Section VIII Div. 1 is:

a. Ul
b. U2
c. U3
d. U

15. Which of the following is essential variable for procedure

qualification?

a. Welder used for welding

b. Weld edge preparation
c. Welding process
d. All of the above

16. Presence of hydrogen can cause which of the

following defects at welds?

a. Slag
b. Under-bead Cracking
c. Lamination
d. All of the above
17. Which of the following method is most suitable for
detecting lamination in 25mm thick C.S. plate?

a. RT
b. UT
c. MT
d. PT

18. A stainless steel weld has a crack open to the surface.

Which NDT method will reveal it effectively?

d. Liquid Pe!It:l'dIIL.
b. Magnetic particle.
c. Radiography.
d. All of above.
4. Sour crude is more corrosive than sweet crude because

a. Sour crude is heavier than sweet crude

b. Sweet crude has more waxing tendency (compared
to sour crude) which forms protective layer on
metallic surfaces hence sweet crudes are less
corrosive.
c. Sour crude contains high content H2S and sulpher
compared to sweet crude which lead to several types
of corrosion
d. None of the above.
5. In planning for an internal inspection of a vessel that has
acidic corrodents, what type and location of corrosion
would you expect to find on the vessel shell, away from
the welds?
a. Hydrogen induced cracking in the vapor space
b. Hydrogen embrittlement in the vapor space
c. Hydrogen blistering near the liquid level
d. Hydrogen embrittlement below the liquid level

6. What can be done to extend the life of a vessel with a

corroded area in the shell plate 12 inches from the weld, a
joint efficiency of less than 1, and a corrosion thickness
currently near the minimum required thickness?

a. Recalculate t minimum for current operating conditions

using E < 1.
b. Recalculate t minimum for current operating conditions
using E = 1.
c. Recalculate t minimum for design conditions using E = 1.
d. Recalculate t minimum for design conditions using E < 1.

7. A pressure vessel constructed according to ASME Sec VIII Div

1 with shell thickness 7/8" (Material of Construction is
classified as P no 4 Gr. i), repaired by using insert plates.
The requirement of radiography to be incorporated in cepair
p. O(.(;C1Ld \:: sl'-l,_~~l 02:

a. Full radiography
b. spot radiography
c. fv1dY be a, or b dependinq on joint effi<jenc!
cj. r)c~L,J is il()t (:1r:eClu(rt:3
1- -- •

, :)
6. Double wall Double image technique is used for the radiography
of:

a. Plate welds
b. Tubular products with outer diameter less than 87.5 mm
c. Large pipes with outer diameter 200 mm and above
d. Heavy castings

7. The temperature measured at a weld layer is around 130 °c

during multipass welding. It is decided to carryout a surface NDT
method. Choose a best combination.

a. Penetrant testing with dry developer

b. Penetrant testing with fluorent penetrant
c. Magnetic particle testing with wet particles
d. Magnetic particle testing with dry particles

8. In a magnetic particle testing, an operator reported a surface

indication with the following dimensions. Major dimension is
6.0 mm and Minor dimension is 2.0 mm. But upon using a
powerful magnifier, later it was revealed that it is only 4 x 1.5
mm. The indication shall be:

a. accepted, as the magnifier shows indication within acceptance standards

b. accepted, as it is not a major defect
c. rejected, as the visual inspection using magnifier shows critical indication
d. rejected, as the dimensions shown by the indication is above acceptance
standards

9. In ultrasonic testing, during scanning, each pass of the search unit

shall overlap a minimum of:

a. 10 % of the transducer dimension parallel to the direction of the scan

b. 10 % of the transducer dimension perpendicular to the direction of the scan
c. 100 % of the transducer dimension parallel to the direction of the scan
d. 100 % of the transducer dimension perpendicular to the direction of the
scan

10. In the radiography, penetrameter is put on the job to:

d. CJaludte the iffldye yU.;IILY 01 tile fcHJiuY1dlJ!1.

b. Measure the strength of the penetrating radiation.
c. Check the density of the radiograph.
d. All of above

47
SETG
API 510 Preparatory Course

1. The purpose of the WPSand PQRis to determine that:

A. the welder is qualified

B. the base metals are strong enough
C. the weldment has the desired properties
D. the skill of the welder

2. The WPS lists:

A. nonessential variables.
B. Essential variables
C. Ranges of 1 & 2 above
D. All of the above

3. The PQRmust list:

A. essential variables
B. qualification test & examination results
C. supplementary essential variables (when notch
toughness is required)

4. What is the earliest Edition of Section IX recognized by

the current edition?

A. 1958
B. 1992
C. 1987
D. 1962

5. New Welding Procedure Specifications must meet the

____ Edition and Addenda of Section IX.
A. 1962
R. tllrrpnt
C. 1986
D. 1995
11. In general, qualification on groove welds also qualifies a
welder to make:

A. Stud welds
B. Overhand welds
C. Fillet welds
D. All of the above

12. Charpy V-notch tests are performed to determine a

weldment's:

A. Tensile strength
B. Ductility
C. Notch toughness
D. All of above

13. A welder making a groove weld using the SAW process

on Pl materials may be qualified using radiography.

A. True
B. False

14. When a tensile specimen breaks in the base metal

outside of the weld or fusion line, the strength recorded
may be at most __ below the, specified tensile and be
accepted.

A. 3.5%
B. 0.5%
C. 5%
D. All of the above

15. Guided-bend specimens shall have no open defects in

the weld or heat effected zone exceeding -----
measured in any direction on the convex surface of the
specimen after bending.

A. 1/1 h"
B. 3/32"
C. 1/8"
D. None of the above

GO
22. The basic purpose of testing a welder is to establish the
welder's _

A. Knowledge of welding requirements

B. Ability to deposit sound weld metal
C. Mechanical ability to operate equipment
D. General attitude toward welding inspectors

23. The record of a welder's performance test is called a

A. PQR
B. WQR
C. WPS
D. WPQ

24. If a welder qualified with the SMAW process on Jan.

1,1994 and last welded with SMAWon March 15, 1994,
would he still be qualified on October 7, 1994?

A. Yes
B. No.

25. A welder qualifying with a groove weld welded from

both sides is qualified to weld _

A. Without backing
B. With all base metals
C. With backing only
D. With Pi backing only

26. Immediate retests of welders' qualifications coupons:

A. Must use the same method

B. May use any method
C. Are not allowed
D. Require Inspector approval

27. Welder performance qualification records must de<:;cribe

all the variables specified.

l\. F.:ssential & nonessential

13. I\!onessential
33. For welder qualifications with the SMAW process
is an essential variable.
-----------
A. Base metal thickness
B. Peening
C. P-number
D. Electrode diameter

34. Each welder must be assigned a(n):

A. P number
B. Unique identifier
C. Hood & gloves
D. Inspector

35. May a welder, qualified in the 2G position on V4 inch

thick plate, weld a 1 inch outside diameter pipe, V4 inch
thick in the horizontal position without re-qualification?

A. Yes
B. No
C. Not enough information provided
D. Yes, provided pipe is carbon steel, P#l

36. What is the difference between gas metal arc-welding

and gas tungsten arc-welding processes?

A. GMAW uses a continuously fed fillet metal and

GTAW a tungsten electrode
B. The SFA specification of the filler metal
C. The F-number of the filler metal
D. GTAW is run with gas; gas is optional with GMAW

37. A welder has been tested in the 6-G position, using as

E-7018 F-4 electrode, on 6" Sch 160 (0.718/f nom) SA
106B pipe. Is this welder qualified to weld a 2/f 300#
ANSI schedule 80 bore flange to a 2/f Schedule 80 SA
106 B nozzle neck?

A. Yes
B. No
C. Not enough information provided
D. Yes, provided a b;lCking strip is pr.,-Nidedin the
2/f weld.
43. A welder may deviate from the parameters specified in
a WPS if they are a nonessential variable.

True Or False (circle one)

44. What is the number of transverse guided bend tests

required for Performance Qualification in a 6G position?

A. 2
B. 4
C. 6
D. 3
45. What positions are necessary to qualify a welder for all
position pipe welding?

A. 3G and 4G
B. 2G and 5G
C. 3G and 1G
D. 4G and 5G

46. What ASMECode Section has welding electrode storage

requirements?

A. ASMEIX
B. ASMEVIII
C. ASMEB31.1
D. ASMEII Part C

47. A repair organization has a WPS which states it is

qualified for P-8 to P-8 material welded with either
E308, E308L, E309, E316, electrodes (SMAW process).
The PQR, supporting this WPS, states the weld test
coupons were SA-240 Type 304L material, welded with
E308 electrodes. Is the WPS properly qualified for the
base material listed?

l\ Vp~

B. 1'10
C. Not enough information given
D. Yes, if properly heat treated
53. You are reviewing a WPQ (QW-484) for a welder testing
in the 6-G position, on SA-53 grade B pipe (TS-60,000
psi). The test results indicate the following:

No.1 Tensile developed 51,000 psi, broke in the weld

No.2 Tensile developed 56,900 psi, broke in base metal
No.1 Transverse root bend satisfactory
No.2 Transverse face bend satisfactory

Will these tests qualify the welder?

A. Yes
B. No
C. Not enough information given
D. Tension test is acceptable but No. 1 is
unacceptable

54. What are the primary classifications of gUided-bend

tests permitted by the Code?

A. Side and Transverse

B. Face and Root
C. Transverse and Longitudinal
D. Side and Face

55. A welder qualified by welding in the 5G position is

qualified for what position on plate?

A. F,H,OH
B. F,V,OH
C. V,OH,SP
D. H,V,OH

56. Which of the following is a covered electrode?

A. E6010
B. E7018
C. E9028
I). All of thp rihO\fp,

57. Applicable essential variables must be documented on

which of the following?

A. The WPS
63. A change in a supplementary essential variable requires
re-qualification, when notch-toughness is a
consideration.

True Or False (circle one)

64. When using Macro-examination of fillet weld tests, the

weld and the HAZ must not reveal cracks when
magnified at:

A. 5X
B. 2X
C. lOX
No magnification is required visual
D.
examination is required, only

65. A non-essential variable may be changes without re-

qualification because:

A. Nobody cares about non-essential variables

B. The welder is allowed to change variables at
his discretion
C. Non-essential variables do not affect the
mechanical or notch-toughness properties
D. Non-essential variables cannot be changes
without re-qualification

66. A WPS must only address essential and, if applicable,

supplementary essential variables.

True Or False (circle one)

67. The data recorded on a PQR (non-editorial) may be

changed provided:

A. The AI approves
B. The test data on a PQR is a record of what
nrrljrn:,rj -~nri sr;()u1d n8\l,?~· be rh::ngc:cL Ot'!,/
editorial information can be changed on a PQR.
C. The API 510 inspector approves
D. The rlate of the WPS is changed

71)
75. Variable QW 404.24 for SAW procedure qualification is
an variable.
-------
A. Essnetial
B. Non-Essential
C. Supplemental essential
D. None of the above

76. Each manufacturer must certify the PQR (by signature)

indicating that the information given is true and correct.

True Or False (circle one)

77. Welder variable QW-405.1 (for welder qualifying with

the SMAW process) is a variable.

A. Essential
B. Non-essential
C. Supplemental essential
D. None of the above

78. The purpose of a WPS and PQR is to determine if a

proposed weldment to be used in construction is
capable of providing the required properties for the
intended application.

True Or False (circle one)

79. A qualification in a 4G position qualifies a welder for all

groove weld positions.

True Or False (circle one)

80. A WPS must address all applicable non-essential

variables.

True Or False (circle one)

81. (jroove weld coupons shall be te~tcd by macro-

examination when qualifying a welding procedure.

True Or F;Jlse (circle one)

7?
B. 1/8 inch
C. 1/16 inch
D. 3/16 inch
E. No defects are allowed

87. What period of inactivity from a given welding process

requires the welder to re-qualify in that process?

A. 3 months
B. 6 months
C. 9 months
D. 12 months
E. As stated by the AI

88. Notch-toughness requirements are mandatory:

A. For heat treated metals

B. For quenched and tempered metals
C. For hardened and tempered metals
D. For annealed and tempered metals
E. When specified as required by the referencing
Code Section

89. A welder qualified for SMAW using an E7018 electrode

is also qualified to weld with:

A. E7015
B. E6011
C. E6010
D. E7024
E. All of the above

90. Macro examination of an etched fillet weld section for

performance qualification is acceptable if the
examination shows:

A. Complete fusion and freedom from tracks,

excepting linear indication not exceeding 1/32
:, ,'h .-:-.~
t-ho r0nt

B. Concavity or convexity no greater than 1/16

inch
C. Not I nore than 1/8" difference in leg length-:;
D. All of the above
E. Bnth B Jnd C nbove

14
91. Each manufacturer or contractor is responsible for the
welding or brazing done by his organization. Whenever
these words are used in Section IX, they shall include:

A. Designer or architect
B. Designer or installer
C. Architect or installer
D. Installer or assembler
E. Assembler or designer

92. For P-11 materials, weld grooves for thick nesses

shall be prepared by thermal
processes, when such processes are to be employed
during fabrication.
A. Less than 5/8 inch
B. 5/8 inch
C. 1 inch
D. 11/4 inches
E. None of the above

93. A SWPs may be used in lieu of a manufacturer qualified

WPS when:
A. approved by the Inspector's Supervisor
B. allowed by ASMEV
C. one test coupon is tension tested per Article V
D. compliance to Article V and Appendix E of
ASMEIX is shown

94. A change in a non-essential variable requires re-

certification of the PQR.

True Or False (circle one)

95. Reduced-section tensile test specimens conforming to

QW-462.1 (b) may be used on all thicknesses of pipe
having an outside diameter greater than:

A. 2 inches
B. 21/2 inches
C. 3 inches
D. 31/2 inches
c. t inches

15
82. A welding procedure must be qualified with impact tests
only when required by the applicable construction code,
such as ASMEVIII Div.!.

True Or False (circle one)

83. A welder qualified to weld in the 2G position on pipe

would have to be qualified in which of the additional
positions to qualify for all position groove welding on
pipe?

A. lG
B. 2G
C. 5G
D. 6G
E. All of the above

84. The maximum preheat temperature decrease allowed

without re-qualification of a GMAW groove weld
procedure is:

A. 50°F
B. 100°F
C. 125°F

D. 150°F
E. None of the above

85. A welder is qualified to weld all thick nesses of material

when:

A. The test is any thickness above 3/8 inch

B. The test thickness was 112 inch
C. The test thickness was 3f4 inch or over
D. The test pipe wall thickness was 5/8 inch and
nominal pipe size was over 1/2 inches

86. What is Ult~ IlklXill :dlll del"eLL 1Jern ,;Led (,\-1 ~h2 CGrr" ,~~(
surface of a welder qualification bend test after bending
except for corner cracks and corrosion resistant weld
overlay?

7:i
68. Tension tests may be used in lieu of bend tests to
qualify welders or welding operators.

True Or False (circle one)

69. A groove weld bend test reveals a linear indication on

the face of the bend surface that measures exactly 1/8"
long. No other indications are seen. Does this coupon
pass or fail?

A. Pass
B. Fail

is a consideration, a
70. Unless notch-toughness
qualification in any position qualifies a welding
procedure for all positions.

True Or False (circle one)

71. The purpose of a WPS and PQR is to determine if a

welder has the skill necessary to make sound
production welds.

True Or False (circle one)

72. Welders can be qualified by radiograph when using P 6X

materials?

True Or False (circle one)

73. It is permissible to sub-contract welding of coupons as

well as other work to prepare coupons.

True Or False (circle one)

74. Variable QW 402.4 for SMAW procedure qualification is

d __ -----.._. \/dl-jaLl,:.:;.

A. Essential
B. Non-essential
C. Supplemental essential
(j. ~Jnne of H,e 3bc'/e
B. The PQR
C. The WPQ
D. All of the above

58. In performance qualification of pipe welds to ASME

Section IX, which positions require more than two
guided bend specimens for qualification?

A. 5G and 6G
B. 2G and 4F
C. 4G and 5G
D. None of the above

59. Name two defects that would cause visual rejection of a

welder's test pipe or plate?
A. Porosity, underfill
B. Lack of penetration/fusion
C. Slag, overlap
D. Any of the above

60. A variable that, when changed will cause a change in

the mechanical properties of the weldment is called a:
A. Essential variable
B. Non-essential variable
C. Supplementary essential variable
D. All of the above

61. The test that determines the ultimate strength of

groove-weld joints is a:
A. Notch Toughness Test
B. Tension Test
C. Fillet Weld Test
D. Guided-Bend Test

62. The procedure qualification test is used to determine:

A. The skill nf the welder

B. That the proposed production weldrnent is
capable of having the required properties
C. The corrosion-reshtance of the proposed
weldment
O. None of the above
48. Maya GMAW, short circuit transfer/ welding procedure
be qualified using real-time ultrasonics?

A. Yes
B. No
C. Not enough information given
D. Yes/ provided bend tests are done.

49. Three arc-welding processes are:

A. BMAW, SMAW, EFGAW
B. FCAW, SAW/ ESW
C. SMAW, GTAW, PAW
D. PTAW, SLAW/ PEAW

50. A welder was qualified with a P-1 test coupon using

SMAW E 7018 electrodes. May the welder weld P-4
material using E8028 electrodes with backing in
production? (Assume the P-4 procedure using E8028
electrodes has been qualified)

A. Yes
B. No
C. Not enough information provided
D. None of the above

51. Is a welding procedure qualified under the 1965 ASME

Code Section IX still applicable?

A. Yes
B. No, must be re-qualified
C. Is only applicable for 1965 pressure vessels
D. Cannot be used for new construction - repairs
only

52. What are the various positions in which a welder may

qualify for plate groove welds?

A. 1G
D. ..)l:J
C. 4G
D. All of the above
38. Maya welder who qualified using a double-groove weld,
make a single V-groove weld without backing?

A. Yes
B. No
C. Not enough information provided
D. Yes, because backing is not an essential
variable for a welder

39. Maya GTAW welder be qualified by radiography, in lieu

of bend tests? The test coupon will be P-22 material and
the production welds will be P-22 also.

A. Yes
B. No
C. Not enough information provided
D. Yes, provided the P-22 is welded with F-22
fillers

40. Who is responsible for qualification of welding

procedures, welders and welding operators?

A. The Inspector
B. The A.I
C. The Shop Foreman
D. The Manufacturer of Contractor

41. A welding electrode has the marking E-6010. The "1"

marking indicates:

A. Flat position only

B. Horizontal position only
C. All positions
D. Only good for heat treated welds

42. Maya FCAWwelder qualified using UT, be used to weld

in production?

A. Yes, welder can be used

B. No welder cannot be used
C. Yes, if welder is using G~/1AW (Short Arc)
D. Yes, if welder is qualified with backing

:~')
C. Essential
D. Brazing

28. A welder depositing 1/2" of weld metal with the SMAW

process is qualified to deposit up to __ ---- of
weld metal.

A. 8"
B. Max to be welded
C. 1"
D. 1h"

29. "P" numbers are used to designate groupS of:

A. Electrodes
B. Flux
C. Base metals
D. Joints

30. A welder qualifying by welding P-No. 21 to P-No.21 is

qualified to weld:

A. P-1- P-11 to P-1 - P -11

B. P-8 - P8
C. P-21 - P-25 TO P-21-P-25
D. P21 to P21 only

31. Welding electrodes are grouped in Section IX by:

A. AWS class
B. ASMEspecification
C. SFA
D. "F" number

32. Ferrous weld metal chemical composition may be

designated using:

A. r-' nUllluef"
B. VI/elder 1. D.
C. "A" number
D. PaSje number
16. When using radiographs to qualify welder, the
acceptance standards used are found in:

A. ASME Section V
B. ASME Section IX
c. ASME Section VII
D. The referencing code

17. A WPS must describe:

A. Essential variables
B. Nonessential variables
C. Supplementary essential variable when
required for notch toughness
D. All of the above

18. A PQR must describe:

A. Nonessential variables
B. Essential variables
C. Results of Welder Qualification tests
D. Project description & NDE methods

19. The must certify the PQR as accurate.

A. Inspector
B. Manufacturer or contractor
C. Welder
D. All of the above

20. For the SMAW process __ -------is an

essential variables for the WPS.
A. Groove design
B. Post Weld Heat Treatment
C. Root spacing
D. Method of cleaning

is
-:> 1. For thp. SAW procpss .
an essential variable for the WPS.
A. Supplemental powdered filler metal (if used)
B. Filler metal diameter
C. Preheat maintenance
O. /\ddition or deletion uf p;.;,~r!·n'd
6. Each shall conduct
--------------
the tests required by Section IX to qualify the WPS's
used during the construction, alteration, or repair.

A. Welder or welding operator

B. Manufacturer or contractor
C. Inspector
D. All of the above

7. The records of procedure, welder and welding operator

qualification must be available to the -----

A. Manufacturer
B. Welder
C. Authorised Inspector
D. Foreman

8. A welder qualifying with a groove weld in plate in the

4G position is qualified to weld groove welds in plate
and pipe over 24"0.D. in at least the ----
positions.

A. Vertical
B. Flat & horizontal
C. Flat & overhead
D. Horizontal

9. A welder qualifying with plate fillet welds in the 3F and

$f positions is qualified to weld groove welds in plate in
the positions.

A. Flat only
B. Flat and horizontal
C. Flat and vertical
D. None of the above

10. A welder qualifying by making a groove weld on pipe

with an 0.0. of 314" in the SG position is qualified to
weid ~[lJove 'Jvt.::ids ill:

A. V2" 0.0. Pipe in the overhead position

B. 6" 0,0. Pipe in the vertical position
C. Yl" 0.0. pipe in the horizoi1talposition
j), j\Jone of the above

,;)
96. Groove weld test may be used for qualification of
welders. Which of the following shall be used for
evaluation?
A. Only bend tests
B. Only radiography
C. Both radiography and bend tests
D. Either bend tests or radiography
E. None of the above
97. Under which of the following conditions can a welder be
qualified during production work?
A. A 6" length .of the fjrstproduction groove weld
may be qualified by radiography
B. A bend test coupon may be cut from the first
12" length of weld
C. A macro examination may be taken from the
first 3" of weld length
D. None of the above
98. Two plate tensile test specimens have been tested and
found to be acceptable. The characteristics of each
specimen are as follows:
Specimen 1: Width of 0.752"; thickness of 0.875"; ultimate
tensile value of 78.524 psi
Specimen 2: Width of 0.702"; thickness of 0.852"; ultimate
tensile value of 77,654 psi
What is the ultimate load for each specimen that was
reported on the laboratory report?
A. 51,668 & 46,445
B. 67,453 & 56,443
C. 78,524 & 77,654
D. None of the above

99. Which of the following welding processes are currently

not permitted to be used with SWPs as referenced in
j\f)opnrlix
.-.", .'
F. nf t\C;MF
,,' '. 1',(7
-.".' ,-

A. GMAW
B. SAW
C. PAW
D. /\!I of the above

76
a. 0.295"
b. 0.195"
c. 0.277"
d. 0.706"

5. A seamless NPS 8, A-53 Grade B pipe operators at

700 degrees F and 700 psi. The allowable stress is
16500 psi. The pipe has been in service for 6 years.
The original wall thickness of the pipe was 0.375". The
pipe wall now measures 0.30". Considering no
structural requirements, estimate how long the piping
can continue to operate and not be below the
minimum thickness.

a. 4.68 years
b. 9.8 years
c. 0 years; pipe now below minimum
d. 10.42 years

6. An Inspector finds a thin area in the body of a NPS8

(8.625" 0.0.) 600# gate valve. The valve's body is made
from ASTM A216 WCB material. The system operates at
700 psi and 750 degrees F. Using a corrosion allowance
of 0.125", what thickness must be present in order to
continue to safely operate? Round to nearest hundredth.

a. 0.48"
b. 0.38"
c. 0.51"
d. 0.43"

7. If corrosion or erosion is anticipated for a valve,

what should be done prior to installing the valve?

a. Severance thickness determinations

should be made when the valves are
installed so that the fretting rate and
metal ruination can be determined

should be made after installation so

that the fatigue rate and metal loss can
be determined
c. Reference '.hickness m<~dsurernents
should he :nrlde when the valves are

"Q
I ',)
b. There was an error made by the inspector at
the installation or the inspector who UT'd the
piping at the next inspection made an error.
c. The UT machine that the inspector used during
the 12 month inspection after installation was
defective and not reading correctly.
d. The pipe contractor or the installer put the
wrong schedule piping in service.

11. You are working as an inspector. While reviewing a

tabulation of thickness data on a section of piping, you
find the letter "C marked under a column headed by
If

If
the word METHOD.What does the "C indicate?

a. The inspection temperature of the pipe was

COLD.
b. The thickness measurement was made by an
inspector with the I.D. OF "C"
c. The thickness measurement was taken with
calipers.
d. The thickness measurement was CONFIRMED
by a second party.

12. Which of the following is not an important function of

an accurate sketch?

a. assist in determining future locations that

urgently require examinations
b. identifying systems and circuits in terms of
location, size, materials etc.
c. serve as field data sheets
d. none of the above

13. As soon as possible after completing an inspection,

the Inspector should:

a. review the inspection records and schedule the next

inspection
h ;::.h/,/i1Ys fP1uin::> ? hyd:"h-,c-::t
c. sign all RT records
d. notify the Piping Engineer, so he can wake up and
go home
SET I
API 510 Prepara~ory Course

1. The maximum depth and radial projection of an imperfection

(deeper than the bottom of the serration) on a NPS 14 raised
face flange is:

a. 0.31"
b. 0.018"
c.~0.18"
d. 0.25"

2. On an NPS 24, 600 Class flange, the thickness of the flange

(minimum) is:

a. 4 V2"
b. 3.00"
c. 6.0"
d. 4.0"

3. The allowable pressure (in psig) on a 100°F, Class 150 8" flange
made from A-182 Grade F2 material is:

a. 170
b. 290
c. 300
d. 400

4. If a Class 1500 flange is to be made from A-182 F347 stainless

steel and will be used at 280 psig with a carbon content of .090/0,
at what maximum temperature can this flange be used?

a. 10000F
b. 13000F
c. 11800F
"-
a. LUuuJr

5. What is the minimum wall thickness of a Class 900 fitting that is

NPS 16?
11. From problem No.9 and No.l0 above, if two areas of sub-
minimum thickness are observed on the fitting, what is the
minimum distance between the edges of these circles?

a. a. 3.0"
b. 2.70"
c. 8.0"
d. 3.70"

12. What is the maximum system hydrostatic test pressure

required for a Class 600 flange in a flanged joint made from
Group 3.5 material?
a. 2250 psi
b. 1500 psi
c. 1000 psi
d. None of the above

13. A local area has been thinned on the wall of a flanged fitting.
The fitting is NPS 12 Class 900, and the local area has been
thinned to 0.945". What is the minimum acceptable thickness
for this thinned area per ASMEB 16.5?
a. 0.9375"
b. 1.250"
c. 1. 7 50"
d. Cannot be calculated from information given

14. From the information in Question No.13, what is the

maximum circular area of sub-minimum thickness allowed in
square inches?
a. 2.75/f
b. 1.33"
c. 1.85"
d. 0.431"

15. Using the information in questions No.13, 14, if two areas of

sub-minimum thickness are observed on the fitting, what is
thf~ rrdnirnllm rlistf':lnCP h~twpen !hp ed~ps ()f 11i("9" cin''''c;?

a. 3.0 11

b. 2.70"
c. 6.~)2"
d. 4 70 11

34
Professional Training and Consultation

SET - J
API 510 Preparatory Course

1. A filmside penetrameter can be used for:

a. inaccessible welds (unable to hand place a

source penetrameter)
b. all welds
c. all castings at any time.
d. an alternative to a source-side wire
penetrameter

2. A dark image of the "B" on a lighter background is:

a. Acceptable
b. Rejectable
c. Sometimes rejectable
d. None of the above

3. One of the procedural requirements for conducting PT is

to address the processing details for:

a. Post-examination cleaning
b. Pre-examination cleaning
c. Apply the penetrant
d. All of the above

4. Non-aqueous developer may be applied to a wet

surface.

True or False (circle one)

5. The accuracy of a piece of magnetizing equipment that

is pOl.liooerl 'Nirh .'111 <'1rnnlPtr:>r c;h;:111 he \/prifipn'
. "

a. Each year
b. Each two years
c. When possible
d. Every 6 months
Professional Training and Consultation

d. None of the above

12. When should a densitometer be calibrated as a

minimum?

a. Annually
b. Every 90 days
c. Whenever it is turned on
d. As required by the Examiner

13. The location markers required by ASMEV are

required to appear as radiographic images.

True or False (circle one)

14. D.C.yokers may be used for detecting subsurface

discontinuities, per ASMEV?

True or False (circle one)

15. When coatings are applied to enhance contrast, the

procedure must be demonstrated that indications
can be detected through the coating.

True or False (circle one)

16. How many total liquid penetrant techniques are

listed in ASMEV?

a. 4
b. 6
c. 2
d. 1

17. Prior to examinations, each adjacent surface shall be

cleaned within at least -- " of the area to be
C~x'j[llilled •

a. 1
b. 1.5
c. 2
d. 3
f.': ~:: ~~:6/'~, ,-.-" /\r()~);!J~ rr-L t9fJ,) :~P<)7 ~ ! 93
Tij'O'-GTJoj·OIIC.ccrn * V';V/'f/·GotoITC.com
Professional Training and Consultation

23. When a PTtest cannot be conducted between 50°-

1250F, what must be done, per ASMEV?

a. The procedure must be qualified.

b. The surface must be re-c1eaned
c. The test cannot be conducted
d. None of the above

24. The sulphur content of a penetrant is measured to be

less than 0.0025g. This material is acceptable for use
on:

a. Nickel-base alloys
b. Carbon steel
c. Ferritic steel
d. All of the above

25. All indications are to be evaluated in accordance

with:

a. ASME VIII
b. ASMEV
c. The referencing Code section
d. The written procedure

26. The scope of the ASME Boiler and PressureVessel,

Code, Section V includes:

a. NDE acceptance crtieria

b. How to perform NDE to achieve a desired
result
c. Where to do NDE (Le. what welds to examine)
d. Who can be the Authorised Inspector

-
LI. U r <:::quq)lllenL IS U.lilOrdced?
a. Before heat-treatment
b. After completing the examination
c. Prior to visual exarnin;)Uon
d. Prior to PT examination
Professional Training and Consultation

33. Thickness readings may be displayed on?

a. SRT
b. PRT
c. CRT
d. Strip chart recorder

34. How many copies of a procedure must be available

to the Manufacturers NDE Personnel?

a. 1
b. 2
c. 3
d.4

35. How shall Non-destructive Examination Personnel be

qualified?

a. To SNT-TC lA
b. To CP-189
c. To referencing code requirements
d. To ACCPrules

36. Which NDE methods are considered "surface"

methods?

a. PT
b. RT
c. MT
d. Both A & C above

37. What designation is used to indicate the

penetrameter is on the film side?

a. fJ,1I r-'
i). An " e"
c. A" D"
0. An "FS"

iJ (').
l~l .'311;62, S~)Ucj /\r(~t;iu ~ Tf~L{?{J;} :) nec::. ,) '\~
in,0':ii'qc,tolj(:>~C!l"n • WWW'~30toITCCOi1l
Professional Training and Consultation

P.(). Bex t~o. /274, DC1(iif'(10rn 31462, SUUC1! !\rnb;cj • iLL (96(;) j B:)} UOD6• FAX
Professional Training and Consultation

28. What finished surface is required of butt welds for PT

examination?

a. Smooth surface prepared by grinding

b. Cosmetically clean acid etched surface
c. A near white blast surface
d. None of the above

29. A penetrameter is used on a DWEjDWV. The

penetrameter selection is based on:

a. The single wall thickness and weld

rei nforcement
b. Both wall thicknesses
c. The single wall thickness for Sch 80 pipe
d. None of the above

30. A suitable means for applying penetrant.

a. Dipping
b. Brushing
c. Spraying
d. Any or all of the above

31. What materials require the use of tested and

certified liquid penetrants as to the contaminants in
the penetrant?

a. Nickel alloys
b. Austenitic stainless steel alloys
c. Ferritic j martensific stainless steel
d. Both a and b, above

32. How shall indications be evaluated, i.e. acceptance

sti1nrlards for RT?
a. To ASME V
b. To ASME VIII
c. To B31.3
d. To the referencing Code section

e.(). bux j"Jo. 7)./4, L)orr:tYl0f"n ~j1462, SUu(jj !\i"uL;;(~ ~ TEl j 'd57 Oel)!) t> i::/~!~
'i 'NV-/Vl.~JC~c\1TC.com
Professional Training and Consultation

18. Water washable penetrant shall be removed with a

water spray not exceeding 60 psi and 100°F.

True or False (circle one)

19. The maximum emulsification time shall be :

a. 5 minutes
b. 10 minutes
c. 15 minutes
d. none of the above

20. Densitometers shall be calibrated by verification with

a calibrated:

a. Densitometer
b. Step Wedge Comparison Strip
c. Light Meter
d. Transmission monitor

21. When using a hydrophillic emulsifier versuSa

lipophilic emulsifier and intermediate step that must
be taken is:

a. pre-flooding with emulisifier

b. pre-cleaning with solvent
c. pre-rinsing with water
d. pre-washing with detergent

11
22. A welded part is to be radiographed and is 1 thick,
with 1/8" reinforcement. What ASTMwire set IQI
should be used on these radiographs if a source side
technique is used:

a. Set A
b. Set B
c. Set C
d. Set D

'</! 1Ft.
S4
Professional Training and Consultation

6. When using fluorescent particles, the examiner shall be

in a darkened area for at least __ -- minutes prior
to performing the examination.

a. 7
b. 10
c. 9
d. 1
7. A wire IQI shall be placed adjacent to the weld, with the
wires parallel to the weld.

True of False (circle one)

8. A field indicator is composed of low carbon

steel pie sections, furnace brazed together.

a. 2
b.6
c. 10
d. 8
9. The type and amperage of magnetizing current must be
identified on the written MT procedure.

True of False (circle one)

10. Certification of contaminants shall be obtained for all

PT materials used on:

a. Carbon steels
b. Ferritic stainless steels
c. Austenitic stainless steels
d. None of the above
11. Black light intensity shall be measured with a
~_. when conducting fluorescent PT.
a. Dark room meter
b. Photo-meter
c. Black light meter
16. What would be the calculated thickness of a new NPS 14
G
'P
~ flanged fitting with a 900 psi class designation?

a. 0.830"
b. 1.28"
c. 1.112"
d. None of the above

A NPS flanged fitting is operating at a temperature of 650°F

17.
and has a pressure class rating of 600 psi. Using a stress
value of 17,400 psi, what would be the maximum permitted
rated working pressure? --

a. 2000 psi
b. 1193 psi
c. 1175 psi
d. 1500 psi

r
a. 1.56"
b. 6"
c. 2"
d. 1"
6. What is the rated working pressure of a flanged fitting that is a
400 Class with a material stress value of 16,200 psi?

a. 1000 psig
b. 1500 psig
c. 800 psig
d. 740 psig
7. What is the minimum wall thickness of a NPS 5 Class 1500
fitting?
a. 0.091"
b. 0.91"
c. 1.00"
d. 1.15"
8. What is the maximum system hydrostatic test pressure required
for a Class 300 flange that is made from Group 1.10 material?

a. 1125 psig
b. 450 psig
c. 1000 psig
d. None of the above

9. A local area has been thinned on the wall thickness of a flanged

fitting. The fitting is NPS 8 Class 400, and the local area has
been thinned to 00400". Is this corrosion acceptable per ASME B
16.5?
a. Yes
b. No
c. Cannot be calculated from information given
d. Wall thicknesses may not be less than that shown in B16.5

10. In question No.9, what is the maximum circular area of

~UUlll;lliIIIUl.i LhickrlC:';s 011O'vJ(c;d, ;" s':Fur~ .i,~h::s?

a. 2.75
b. 0.74
c. J.. 85
d,0,'B1
14. The Wenner 4-Pin methods, the soil bar, and the
soil box do not represent methods of determining:

a. holidays
b. pipe-to-soil potentials
c. cathodic protection acceptability
d. all of the above

15. The total resistivity for a Wenner 4-Pin test that

utilizes pins spaced 2 feet apart and a 6 "R" factor is:

a. 2298 ohm/em
b. 3500 ohm/em
c. 6000 ohm/em
d. 8000 ohm/em

16. Which of the following is not a consideration when using

a soil bar?

a. using a standard prod bar

b. avoiding the addition of water
c. applying pressure on the soil bar after injection
d. none of the above

17. Which of the following is a consideration when using a

soil box:

a. depth of Pins less than 4% of spacing

b. ensuring the soil has dried out before testing
c. avoiding contamination of the sample during
handling and storage
d. all of the above

, 1
, I
installed so that the corrosion rate and
metal loss can be determined
d. Retina measurements of the macula
should be made when the iris' are
installed so the optical rate and losses
of perception can be determined

8. Which of the items listed below would NOT normally

be contained in inspection records or piping?

a. Original date of installation, the

specifications and strength levels of the
materials used.
b. Original vessel hydrotest pressures and
conditions that the tests were
performed under
c. Original thickness measurements and
the locations and dates of all
subsequent readings
d. Calculated retirement thicknesses

9. Accurate records of a piping system make possible

an evaluation of on any piping, valve or
fitting

a. Computerisation
b. Security and continuity
c. Cost and competency
d. Service life

10. You are working as an inspector. While reviewing a

tabulation of thickness data on a section of piping in
non-corrosive or very low corrosive service, you find
the initial thickess reading of an inspection point to
be 0.432" and marked nominal on a NPS 6 pipe. At
the next inspection 12 months later you find a
reading by ultrasonics of 0.378" at the same point.
Twelve months later UT readings were taken c-ndthe
;.ilicklic::,S Lit the pcillt ,'J.j.) ,jUl C,J78". ,',h::;'.would
this mean to you?

a. No measurement was t]k~n originally, the

nominal thickness was listed arid;: Ie piuinq
probably had an under to!,"'rar:Ct=: of 12. 'J".

19
SET H
API 510 Preparatory Course
1. In the Barlow formula for determining pipe
thickness, the term 5 stands for:

a. internal design gage pressure of the pipe in

psi.
b. pressure design strength for internal pressure,
In inches
c. allowable unit stress at the design
temperature, in psi
d. maximum strain at the average operating
tenperature, in psi

2. At low pressures and temperatures, the thickness

determined by the Barlow formula may be so small
that the pipe would have structural strength.

a. adequate
b. insufficient
c. ample
d. good

3. A seamless NPS 12, A-l06 Grade A pipe operators at

300 degrees F and 941 psi. The allowable stress is
16000 psi. Using the Barlow Equation, determine the
thickness required for these conditions.

a. 0.375"
b. 0.750"
c. 0.353"
d. 0.706"

4. A seamless NPS6, A-106 Grade A pipe operators at

10n 0PClrpps F nnd 941 psi. The allowable stress is
16000 psi. The owner-user specified that the pipe
must have 0.1" allowed for corrosion allowance. Using
the Barlow Equation, determine the thickness required
for these conditions
API 570 Model question-2
The following is a collection of questions remembered by various students who took API 570
exam in the past.

The answers will be found in the following reference publications

API Standard 570 Piping inspector code

API Recommended practice 574

ASME Boiler & Pressure vessel code

Sec.V Non-destructive examination

Sec. IX Welding and brazing qualifications

ASME B 16.5 Pipe flanges & Flanged fittings

ASME B 31.3 Process Piping

31. When evaluating a radiograph of 2 1/4" thick carbon steel piping, what is the maximum geometric unsharpness?

A. 0.020
B. 0.030
C. 0.040
D. 0.070

Section/page Reference Publication. _

32. What is the test position when the pipe is vertical?

A. 1G
B. 2G
C. 5G
D. 6G
Section/page Reference Publication. _

33. The location markers which are to appear as radiographic images on the film shall be placed on the

A. part
B. film holder/cassette
C. film side only
D. IQI

34. What is the outside diameter of a gasket for a Class 400 NPS 12 slip-on raised face flange, the edges of the gasket
do not extend to the bolt.

A. 12.75"
G. 15.00"

API 510 i'-1odel quest:on-2 i'lohan i~aj

Section/page Reference publicatlon. _

42. A WPS is written qualified welding procedure prepared to provide direction for -----

A. Making production welds to code requirements

B. The welder to make temporary welds
C. The inspector for inspection of the welds
D. The welder to use as a general guideline

Section/page Reference publication. _

43. A steel that hardens during cooling in air from a temperature above its transformation range is --------

A. Quenched and tempered steel

B. Annealed steel
C. Air-hardened steel
D. Normalised steel

Section/page Reference Publication, _

44. A pipe welder successfully passes a 6G pipe test. The welder can weld in which of the following positions?

A. lG
B. 2G
C. 5G
D. All positions

Section/page Reference Publication, _

45. A radiograph may be produced without a written procedure If ------

A. A client approves it
B. The inspector approves it
C. The density and penetrameter meet Article-2 requirements
D. The weld quality is satisfactory

Section/page Reference publication. _

46. The work necessary to restore a piping system to a condition suitable for safe operation at the design condition is

A. rework
B. repair
C. renewal
D. Total replacement

Section/page Reference Publication _

47. Material in the form of ring used to support molten weld metal is called -------

A. Backing gas
B. Cold wire slug
C. Consumable insert
D. Backing ring

Section/page Reference Publication, _

48. 8ackscatter radiation Is determined by the use of

A. A lead "B" on the back of the film holder.

B. A film badge
C. A radioactive meter
D. A mirror held parallel to the film holder

Section/page u ~
_____ Reference Publicdlion

Page 3 of 5
lPI 510 ivlodel qlJest!on-2 Mohjfl Rdj
D. prohibited
Section/page Reference Publication, _

56. Welding terms not specifically referenced in ASME B31.3 can be found In what document?

A. ASME Section IX
B. ASME Section V
C. AWS A 2.4
D. AWS A 3.0

Section/page Reference publication. _

57. How many tensile test are required to qualify a W' plate groove weld?

A. 2
B. 3
C. 4
D. 6

Section/page Reference Publication. _

58. What is the maximum allowable prod spacing using an J= prod technique?
A. t/2
B. 8 inches
C. 10 inches
D. No spacing required

Section/page Reference Publication. _

59. ____ may not be performed on the root pass or final pass of a weld.

A. Peening
B. Cleaning
C. Stress Relieving
D. Painting

Section/page Reference Publication _

60. Which of the following are not normally performed on piping?

A. Internal visual inspection

B. Excavation of buried piping
C. Thickness measurements
D. External visual inspection

Section/page Reference Publication _

Mohan Raj
API 570 Model question-3
The following is a collection of questions remembered by various students who took API 570
exam in the past.

The answers will be found in the following reference publications

API Standard 570 Piping inspector code

API Recommended practice 574

ASME Boiler &. Pressure vessel code

Sec.V Non-destructive examination

Sec. IX Welding and brazing qualifications

ASME B 16.5 Pipe flanges &. Flanged fittings

ASME B 31.3 Process Piping

61. A physical change in any component that has design implications affecting the pressure containing capacity of a
piping system is defined as a(n) _

A. rework
B. repair
C. renewal
D. alteration

Section/page Reference Publication _

62. Determine the MAWP, at the next inspection, of the following piping system based on the following

Design pressure/ Temperature 700 PSIG/300oF

Pipe description NPS 10, SA 285 Gr.C, EFW Spiral seam-No RT
Thickness determined from inspection 0.30 in.
Observed corrosion rate 0.02 infyear
Next planned inspection 5 years

MAWP = _

A. 263 PSIG
B. 329 PSIG
C. 732 PSIG
D. 125 PSIG

Section/page Reference Publication _

A. This action is not allowed by ASfY!f':, Section V

B. When the piping engineer approves
C. When the inspector specifically approves
D. 'Nhen the other ~IT·' ployer is a SII1Kontra\.tnr f·)r the current employer

Section/page Keference "ublicatioll _

Section/page Reference Publication. _

71. As a standard technique, the temperature of the penetrant and the surface of the part to be processed shall not be
above _

A. 125°F
B. 50°F
C. 32°F
D. 81°C

Section/page Reference publlcation. _

72. When valve body and/or closure pressure tests are performed after servicing, they should be conducted in
accordance with:

A. API 598
B. API 798
C. NACE RP 0169
D. ASME B 31.3

Section/page Reference Publication. _

73. The minimum thickness at each TML can be located by ultrasonic scanning or ----

A. Hammer testing
B. radiography
C. Magnetic particle testing
D. Penetrant testing

Section/page Reference Publication. _

74. During the calibration of MT equipment the lifting power of an DC yoke must be at least ------

A. 100 Ibs.
B. 40 Ibs.
C. 10 Ibs.
D. 5lbs.

Section/page Reference Publication, _

75. Lines that sweat are susceptible to deterioration at areas of _

A. High point vents

B. supports
C. high temperature
D. low temperature

Section/page Reference Publication. _

76. Services that are flammable but do not significantly vaporize when they leak and are not located in high-activity
areas are labeled _

A. Class 1
B. Class 2
C. Class 3
D. Class 4

Section/page . Reference Publication. _

A. 7 to 60 min
B. 30 to 60 min
C. 60 to 120 min
D. dllytime after 2·+ hours
Section/page Reference Publication _

85. The owner of buried piping should conduct surveys of the surface conditions on and adjacent to each pipeline path
every

A. 6 months
B. 12 months
C. yearly
D. S years

Section/page Reference Publicatlon _

86. Radiographic film density shall be checked by a densitometer calibrated on a step wedge film traceable to

A. API 650
B. ASNT SNT TC-1A
C. ASME Section IX
D. A national standard

Section/page Reference Publication _

87. Gate valves larger than NPS 2 usually have _

A. Full port openings

B. An "S" seat area
C. A restricted full-open port
D. A venture-gate

Section/page Reference Publication _

88. Filler metals, for piping welds, shall conform to the requirements of?

A. AWS AS.1
B. ASME Section IX
C. ASME Section V
D. API 570

Section/page Reference Publication _

89. During the inspection of S/A Interface, excavation was required, what is he minimum depth required?

A. 1 inch to S inches
B. 6 inches to 12 inches
C. 13 inches to 19 inches
D. Inspector desecration

Section/page Reference Publication _

90. If gate valves are known to be exposed to corrosion/erosion, thickness readings should be taken in an area of high
turbulence and stress, usually:

A. On the gate
B. On the stem
C. On the outlet side connection
D. Between the seats

Section/page Reference Publication _

Page 'j ')f ')

API 570 Model question-4
The following is a collection of questions remembered by various students who took API 570
exam in the past.

The answers will be found in the following reference publications

API Standard 570 Piping inspector code

API Recommended practice 574

ASME Boiler & Pressure vessel code

Sec.V Non-destructive examination

Sec.IX Welding and brazing qualifications

ASME B 16.5 Pipe flanges & Flanged fittings

ASME B 31.3 Process Piping

91. A point in the repair or alteration process beyond which work may not proceed until the required inspection has
been performed and documented is called a(n) _

A. Hold point
B. Inspection point
C. Wait for the inspector and charge extra period
D. Thickness measurement location

Section/page Reference Publication, _

92. The exposed surface of a weld on the side from which the welding was done is called the weld -------

A. Cap
B. toe
C. face
D. root

Section/page Reference Publication _

93. A term which indicates that a provision is recommended as good practice but not a code requirement.

A. must
B. may
C. shall
D. should

Section/pilge . _. Reference Publication

94. With post-emulsifying penetrants the emulsification time is _

M.. l~dselj l)(l Wdltr pressui e

11. Nnt as import.,nt .'lS the dwell time
C. To be calculated based on surface temperature
D. To be determined experimentally

S·,ction/page. :Zeference Publ!cation _

102. The certification agency for API 570 is the _

A. American Welding Society

B. American Petroleum Institute
C. American Production In-Service Group
D. American Piping Inspecton

Section/page Reference Publicatlon. _

103. During the calibration of MT equipment, the lifting power of an AC yoke must be at least ------

A. 100 Ibs.
B. 40 Ibs.
C. 10 Ibs.
D. Sibs.

Section/page Reference Publication _

104. During the fluorescent MT test, the black light intensity shall be measured at least once every ------

A. hour
B. 2 hours
C. 4 hours
D. 8 hours

Section/page Reference Publication _

105. When a pipe qualification coupon for welders or welding operators has failed radiographic examination, the
immediate retest shall be by radiographic examination. The weld length shall be

A. One complete pipe weld

B. Two complete pipe weld
C. Two pipe welds for a total of 12" of weld
D. Two 12" plate coupons

Section/page Reference Publication, _

105. What percentage of all suspect areas and areas of damaged insulation should be inspected for a Class 3 system that
is within susceptible temperature ranges?

A. 100%
B. 75%
C. 50%
D. 10%

Section/page Reference Publication _

107. What is the heat treatment holding time based on hour per inch of carbon steel 1V4" thick?

A. 2.4 hr/in
B. 1.5 hr/in
C. 1.0 hr/in
D. 0.5 hr/in

Section/page Reference Publication. _

MAWP (This information applies to question 108-120, where applicable)

Design pressure/temperature 564 psi/900°F

Pipe description NPS 12, Sch.160, A 285 Gr.B, A672 Class 23 A S (J

Thickness from Inspection 0.997"
Corrosion Rclte
Class 1

API 510 Model questionA Moivlll :<aj Page 3 of 5

115. What is the outside diameter of a gasket type E-2 for the fitting in question 114?

A. 10.62"
B. 8.62"
C. 12.12"
D. 12.62"

Section/page Reference Publication _

116. What is the P number for the pipe in question 108?

A. 1.5
B. 1
C. 6
D. 24

Section/page Reference Publication. _

117. What Is the Group number for the pipe in question 108?

A. 1.5
B. 1
C. 6
D. 24

Section/page Reference Publication. _

118. What is the SFA number for E-7048 electrode?

A. 5
B. 5.1
C. 5.29
D. 5.42

Section/page Reference Publicatlon _

119. What is the filler number for E-7018 electrodes?

A. 1
B. 2
C. 3
D. 4

Section/page Reference Publication. _

120. What is the position designation for welding pipe in the horizontal fixed position?

A. 2G
B. 3G
C. SG
D. 6G
Section/page Reference Publication _

API 510 Medel 'luesUon-4 Mohan Raj Page 5 of 5

API 570 EXAM
Dec.2004

Note: Tick only one alternative which you think is most appropriate.

1. Which of the marking on a flange is not mandatory

A. Name of the manufacturer
B. rating
C. Temperature
D. Ring number

2. For a Pl1 material piping under repair, what short of heat treatment is required?
A. Preheat it to 300°F before start the welding
B. Local post weld heat treatment is required
C. Follow the construction procedure
D. Local post weld heat treatment with 200°F

3. For a 16mm thick 3D" 0 pipe repair work what is the correct heat treatment
A. Preheat to 300°F and weld
B. Follow the construction recommendation
C. Preheat to 175°F
D. Preheat to 175°C

4. Who is ultimately responsible for repair, re-rating and alteration of a pipe system?
A. The inspector
B. The piping engineer
C. The owner/user
D. The Fabricator
~C:;
5. The longitudinal bend test of a procedure qualification test piece is to be made
A. The weld should be parallel to the longitudinal axis of the plate and the root should be in the
convex
B. The weld should be perpendicular to the longitudinal axis of the plate and the root should be in the
convex
C. The weld should be parallel to the longitudinal axis of the plate and the root should be in the
concave
D. The weld should be perpendicular to the longitudinal axis of the plate and the root should be in the
concave

6. A radiograph taken on a weld without a written procedure

A. It is to be rejected
B. It acceptable provided it meets the density and sensitivity limitations of ASME Sec.V
Article. II
C. It is depends on the project spec
D. A Level-III shall be consulted

7. The material used on a weld repair shall be of

A. Same as that of the original material
B. API should approve the material
C. It is of known weldable quality
D. A piping engineer shall be consulted

8. A pipe support moved outs of its base and is hanging what is your assessment as a inspector
A. A wider support with additional restrainer
B. Consult piping engineer before advise any recommendation
c. Carry out a stress analysis
O. Correct tne support with a bigger base material

9. A piping system of 2 1/4 Cr materials operates at 80QoFfor more than 10 years. What problem can be
expected?
A. Temper embrittlement
B. Norrlldlizing
C. Filtigue
D. Cre~p

to. A.pentameter ;:; used on :l RT. Where if:s placed 011 ~hejob
,1\. !h,~,:,;1'("5 SII(;1 I oe I : .. 21/,!'!

Mohan Paj PdQ" 1 of JU

-
A. 12" or 3 OD whichever is greater
B. 10 OD of the pipe
c. 6 OD of the pipe
D. 3 OD of the pipe

22. What are the minimum marking shall be made of a buried piping leak temporarily clamped area
A. ID number & depth of the pipe
B. Date of installation
C. ID number, date of clamp installation
D. Depth of pipe and Date of clamp installation

23. The soil closed potential survey is being carried out for a non Cathodically protected system is
E. Once in 5 years
F. Once in 3 years
G. Half of the remaining life
H. Once in 6 months

24. A buried piping with sleeve is excavated for inspection,

A. Check thickness of the sleeve
B. Check water or soil between sleeve and pipe
C. Check the cathodic protection on the system
D. Carry out closed potential survey

25. If a concrete interface of a piping system shows coating deterioration

A. Excavate the interface area and carry out through inspection
B. Carry out cathodic protection inspection
C. Check the records and carry out thickness
D. The area shall be continuously monitored

26. Which of the valve in a piping system is not suitable for pigging
A. Gate valve
B. Ball valve
C. Globe valve
D. Slide valve

27. While doing vessel inspection a misalignment is being observed

A. Check the foundation
B. Check the connected piping system
C. Check all the pipe work in the region
D. Check the nozzle

28. What minimum thickness required to order for a piping of 6" with pressure 500 psi @ 300°F, API 5L Gr. B
material keeping in mind the under tolerance of -12.5%
A. Sch-40
B. Sch-20
C. Sch-80
D. Sch-std

29. A plate material is used for which of the fitting

A. Valve
B. elbows
C. flanges
D. Blind flanges

30. Which of the test method is not a material identification test method
A. Portable X-ray fluorescence method
j). 'J!Jlicdl eilllS"-'lon speLtro!lieuy lIIetilOd
C. Eddy cu'rent test mdhod
D. Chemical spot test method

31. Which type of the PHI is lbed in the field

A. X-ray fluorescence methud
B. c:qotip h.lrdress tester
C C:ddy ClJrT""lt
D. cheil,tc.':'l: ,)t).,)[

32. Wh,J': typeJf ilisped:Ull :5 not nonnJiiy done on a ping system

Page 3 of 10
;\PI 570 Oec.2004 t'.Ai:'!m
Moh.n R.j
43. As soon as a hydro test is over what should be done
A. Dry the system
B. Activate the relief valve system to the pre testing set up
C. Add chemical to dry it
D. Purge the system

44. What is the minimum hydrotest holding time

A. 10 minutes
B. 3 minutes
C. 30 minutes
D. 1 hour

45. When a buried piping with a design pressure of 100 psi is under leak test at 125 psi. The initial 4 hrs. of
testing shows a slight pressure drop and has been adjusted. The second 4 hrs recorded a drop in pressure
of 5 psi, the test
A. It is not acceptable
B. Check for leak along the pipe work
c. The test is acceptable
D. To be consulted with a inspector

46. The pressure gauge used on a sensitive leak test shall be of

A. 2 to 2.5
B. 2
C. 1.5 to 4.0
D. 1.5 to 3.0

47. Which combination of electrode is preferred for welding a full encirclement sleeve at low ambient
temperature
A. E XX16 & EXX18
B. E XX10 & EXX16
C. E XX10 & EXX18
D. E XX12 & EXX18

48. A new branch is welded over an existing piping system it should meet what
A. Construction code requirements
B. The owner requirement
C. The fabricator requirement
D. Contact the designer or consultant

49. A radiographic testing for the welder qualification is not allowed for which process
A. GMAW globular transformation
B. GMAW short circuiting
C. GMAW
D. SMAW

50. What is the purpose of Welding procedure specification

A. To have a data in the hand
B. To be followed by the welder
c. To give welder enough confident
D. To have a known quality of weld metal produced

51. What is the size of a test point on a piping system with OD greater than 10"
A. 3" dia
B. 4" dia
C. 2" dia
D. 2" or 3" dia

52. The thickness readings obtained in a Test pcint are 0 253, 0.267, 0.283 & 0.279 what thickness /alue
should be considered for our remaining life calculations.
A. 0.2830 mm
B. 0.2705 rnrn
C. O.2~00 mrn
D. 0.2507 rnm

.':,-5, '\1V~(it LnjeKness c.-:dc'J!~~~:''-1';

is u:.:.,ed in ~~1i\',·'v'P
;-\. f\:ctUdl min~s two times the cOITosiCi! >,t 'he r,:c·vr 'n;pection
H. i'~ul~-l'nal :;'~!!~L\-:)1.\,\10 tlrneS L:>~ (\,j'n~:-~!i "1 ;)tr-[' ~ \',2/'[- " ispec"on
Page 5 of 10
t,PI 570 Dc<.20C>4oxo'"
-
B. Whenever there is a major repair/yearly
C. Once in a week
D. As per Owner user instruction

65. A welder qualified in 3G position also qualified to weld in what are all the other positions
A. Fillet weld all positions, Groove weld Flat only
B. Fillet weld any position, Groove weld vertical only
C. Fillet weld Flat, Vertical, Horizontal position, Groove weld Flat, Vertical only
D. Fillet weld Flat, Vertical, Horizontal position, Groove weld Vertical only

66. The PMI test carried out on materials in store is

A. Not a replacement to site PMI testing requirement
B. Considered as part of the testing and no need to repeat it at site
C. It should be used as a guide
D. The PMI test need not be repeated at site

67. How many test specimens are required to qualify a welding procedure
E. 4 nos.
F. 6 nos.
G. 2 nos.
H. 8 nos.

68. A carbon steel A516 Gr.70 material of 1 W' thick is qualified up to what temperature without impact test
A. -21°F
B. -29°F
C. -26°F
D. -26°C

69. A welder qualification in production weld of first 6" length inspection failed by x-ray. What is the next
inspection requirement if at all he has to be qualified
A. X-ray another 6" from the production
B. X-ray another 12" from the production weld
c. Weld a 2" dia pipe and x-ray, if it is pass allow him to continue
D. Weld a 6" dia pipe and qualify

70. Reheating a hardened metal to a temperature below the transformation range to improve toughness is
A. Annealing
B. Normalizing
C. Tempering
D. Stress relieving

71. The location markers which are to be appeared on the radiograph will be normally placed
A. On the film holder
B. On the part to be radiographed
C. On the back side of the film holder
D. It should be kept on the weld

72. Specially made probes can used up to what temperature for measuring thickness of material
A. 1000°C
B. 1100°C
C. 1100°F
D. 1000°F

73. One of the disadv;mtage of Radiography is

A. It is a permanent record
5, It used for finding thickness on a hot system with adequate :)rotection
C. It can bi~ used in il !sulated system thickness measurement
D. The cost of the testing

74. Which NDT will be useful in carrying out thickness measurement on a system operating at 100°C
A. Ultrasoni.· testing
13. R;:H.iiograpilictesting
C Eddy c1lrrpnt testing
D. Hampler t.~stir-j

75. The huried pipi'9 system s!l\Juid be inspeded'ln its path

;\. \ 'i 'c~ . I .1./~ ..(
Page 7 of 10
API SJO D~'.2004 Qy.,m Mohan Raj
86. What is an auxiliary piping
A. All secondary process piping
B. Any small bore piping
C. Instrument and machinery piping typically small bore secondary process piping
D. Connected to level gauge

87. The unacceptable indication is a/an

A. imperfection
B. indication
C. defect
D. repair

88. After a weld repair is completed on a pressure part a pressure test is

A. Required if the inspector deemed it is necessary
B. Required if the piping engineer deemed it is necessary
C. Not mandatory
D. Not a requirement as per API 570

89. While carrying out welding there was a change in the essential variable, how to deal with the situation
A. make a new PQRto suit the variable
B. make a new WPSmention the non essential variable
C. make additional testing to meet the code requirement
D. change the WPS & PQR

90. Fillet wedld patch repair is acceptable provided the SMYSis

A. Lessthan 40 ksi
B. greater 40 ksi
C. 40 ksi
D. None of the above
91. A 8"diameter 600# slip-on flange raised face width gasket with edges extending to the bolt outside
diameter
A. 8.62
B. 12.00
C. 12.62
D. 12.5

92. The personnel carrying out NDT shall be qualified in accordance

A. SNT TC 1A
B. AWS SNTTC 1A
C. API
D. AWS

93. Densitometer shall be calibration shall be verified with a

A. Calibrated meter
B. National standard calibration step wedge film
C. Approved laboratory
D. By a ASNT Level III

94. Socket weld is not preferred for

A. < NPS2
B. < NPS3
c. < NPS2 1/2
D. > NPS 2

Page 9 of 10
AVI ~lO Dec.Z004 nc,m Moha 11 Ra)
The PQRwas made for a 1 114" thick material, 4 nos. tensile and 4 nos. face bend with the range qualified
mentioned on the WPSis 1/16" to 2 1/4"

95. Is the tensile test carried out is correct

A. No split tensile is allowed
B. No3 is not okay
c. No.1 & No.3 is not okay
D. No.2 & No.4 is not okay

96. Is the bend test are of correct spec

A. Yes
B. It should be side bend
c. It should be substituted with longitudinal bend test also
D. None of them is correct

97. Is the range qualified in the WPSis correct

A. It should be 3/16" to 2.5"
B. It should be 3/8" to 2.5"
c. It should be 3/8" to 2.25"
D. It should be 3/16" to 2.25"

One calculation for blank thickness and one calculation using ASME B31.3 formula for finding minimum
required thickness. There were about 15 problems asking to find out remaining life, short term corrosion rate,
long term corrosion rate and minimum required thickness etc.,

Open Book 58 questions

Closed Book 92 questions were asked in this time.

P1ge 10 of 10
Mohan Raj
API 570 Oec.2004 exam
B. Once in six months
C. Three yearly
D. Five yearly
76. When operating condition is changed to a new condition what data should be consider for recalculating the
remaining life & its inspection frequency
A. Get the data from API
B. Any published data
c. Owner user experience & the data of similar service
D. Check with the corrosion engineer
77. What percentage of damaged insulation should be removed for inspection of a Class-3 system operates
within the CUI temperature
A. 10
B. 50
c. 75
D. 25
78. What type of testing should be avoided on a caustic line which has been PWHT
A. Eddy current testing
B. Hardnesstesting
C. Hammer testing
D. Ultrasonic testing

79. What is the maximum Brinell hardness of base metal P-6 material
A. 270
B. 241
C. 225
D. not specified
80. A piping system classified as Class-1 with an injection point on the system was constructed three years
back
A. It can be done at the end of the five years
B. Carry out a comprehensive inspection of the injection point circuit
C. Carry out inspection of the whole piping system as it is due for inspection
D. The inspection interval should be specified by owner

81. API 570 applies to what piping systems

A. All pipe work in the plant should be covered
B. It is applied for drinking water
C. It is applied for Fire water & cooling water
D. It is applied to raw, intermediate and finished products

82. The bolts should extend up to what length

A. Not more than one thread
B. It should be flushed with the nut
C. It should be at least two threads out side
D. It should be at least one thread out side

83. A welder's qualification become invalid

A. If he has not welded for more than three months
B. If he has not welded for more than a year
C. If he has not welded for more than nine months
D. If he has not welded for more than six months
m
f.' 'to ';Jr. :"' ;~"fiI" P,-l:'~~":,hy ;:J 'T"r!( ""p inclirC1tion '.,/C1C,nh<:prw;d to """fir it ',\IrA ;nc,!'prtion shC)ltlrl be
applied
A. Carry out wet fluorescent magnetic particle testing
B. Carry out dye penetrant testing
C. Carry out eddy current testing
D. Carry out hair mer testing

~jS. ;\ defee: i'le Ji!jillg :"y .t~"Ylwill be ,:;,!,:-Iu·:tcd in ;)cconiawe: ld '!·t

,e'[ ',p ':;74
,). P.Pl RP ,':'79

D. "PI R.P:)31
Page 8 of 10
Mohan Raj
API 570 Oec.2004 exam
C. Nominal minus three times the corrosion at the next inspection
D. Actual minus one times the corrosion at the next inspection

54. What type of repair work done on a piping system does not require piping engineers approval
A. A longitudinal crack on a piping
B. Any crack on the nozzle
c. An approved repair organization carrying out a repair does not require approval
D. Routine repair work in which inspector is confident about the repair organization

55. A longitudinal crack on a piping is planned for repair with a full encirclement sleeve,
A. It should be designed and approved by a fabricator
B. It should be designed and approved by a inspector
C. It should be designed and approved by a piping engineer
D. It should be designed by a fabricator

56. A temporary repair can be permanent one if

A. It is acceptable to production
B. It is acceptable to owner user
C. It is acceptable to piping engineer & inspector
D. It is acceptable to piping engineer

57. The penetrant materials used for inspection of a Stainless steel weld inspection needs to have
A. Check for the consumable test certificate for the amount of halogen present
B. Check for the expiry dated
c. Check for its batch number
D. Check for the consumable test certificate for the amount of sulphur present

58. An examiner is the one who helps the inspector

A. Is not a qualified API inspector
B. Is the one evaluate the NDT results
c. Is the one approved by the User
D. Is the one

59. The test carried out on a notched specimen is called

A. The Brinell hardness test
B. Impact test
C. Tensile break test
D. Bend test

60. Which is an essential variable for SMAWwelding

A. Weld configuration
B. Position
C. F#
D. Cleaning method

61. A normal fluid service system piping of 6mm thick what is the maximum under cut permissible on a grith
weld
A. 1.5 mm
B. 3.0 mm
C. 4.5 mm
D. No under cut is permitted for this thickness

62. What is the maximum reinforcement permitted on a severe cyclic system pipework of 13mm thick
A. 1.5 mm
B. 3.0 mm
r 4.'5 ["0 •••• 1
D. None of the above

63. TML on a system eliminated or reduced from a piping system

A. Whenever the examiner feels
B. When no need to take thickness
C. When the inspector eVcliuate Jnd establish that the systel ns cnrosive natur~ and
(~')I'i';,"quence of fJilure
D. [very ditcrnati\,'}; in.c..pelJion

G'l, The ;>~-~rmanpntm;-:gnet;c y(:kf~ iL;~>din r-;~ ne"-~,~p(~rtir.!e t(·'"~tif·'(ln\~(~rlc;to hr~ r'ilibr .. rl
lb ....

A. Once in three month

Pdge 6 of 10
API 570 Oec.Z004 exam Mohan R;lj
E. visual
F. radiographic
G. internal visual
H. ultrasonic

33. Which of the material is least successitible to mix up

A. 30" dia pipe
B. bolts
C. 2" dia cooling water line
D. Small bore fitting

34. A 20" dia pipe has internal wastage near the flange to pipe weld. During shut down what short of
inspection will be planned for this
A. Internal visual inspection
B. Boroscope inspection
C. Renew the spool
D. Mark the section and replace

35. Flangedjoints that have been clamped and pumped with sealant. If repumping is contemplated
A. Renew the bolts
B. Renew the flange, bolts and clamp
C. Renew the clamp & bolts
D. Renew the sealent

36. To detect interior surface breaking planar flaws the owner/user should specify
A. Approved inspector
B. Industry qualified UT inspector
C. API qualified inspector
D. Any examiner qualified to carry out NDT

37. Out of the patch mentioned which one is not allowed on a 12" piping repair
A. 8" dia circular patch
B. 6" dia circular patch
C. 6" X 6" patch with 1" round corner
D. Box type patch

38. Out of the repair carried out in the piping system which one is considered to be a permanent one
A. Grind and remove the defect and build up the area
B. Split clamp bolted
c. Split sleeve full welded
D. Any clamp approved by piping engineer

39. A carbon steel piping at what operating temperature is successitible to CUI

A. Temperature above 12Soe
o
B. Temperature between -4°e to 12S e
c. Temperature between 6s e to 205°C
o

D. Temperature below -4°C

40. What percentage of suspected insulation on a stainless steel Class-3 piping operating at 300°F should be
removed for inspection
A. 0 % of the suspected insulation
B. 10 % of the suspected insulation
C. 25 % of the suspected insulation
D. 50 % of the suspected insulation

• i. \/'r<I~~ :~ j:.~ ~~·~pr;:dt-."'i '''J~ :J rllss 3 :'ipinfJ . ,,.,'"'tvV'!

A. Product is pumped to remote location fOf loading and storing
B. i iighly corrosive acid in the plant
c. Any corrosive chemical
D. System carrying naphtha without hydroqen sulfide

t12. A pipiny system has been rerated to a lower operating ternperdLurp, to va!!date the rerate
/\, t': th~ 1'~;.'\I·~rt(;rnper:ltui:~ p:~quj(z,rr;ent·)5 r"-:'I-c!Je ;s (f' .1,:
~~. C;~rry 0;_~t .-11.}(:(h toughrh::SS to pstdblish its (~.srJi.j:;I:l
C. /\1-'1 should be contacted
i~ .\rIY .~~ \1'11:(; ;s knovv:f:~dq'~dl)l~ to be conttJct(::d

Page 4 of 10
Mohan Raj
API 570 Dec.2004 ,"X~l'n
B. The wires should be perpendicular to the weld
C. It may be parallel or perpendicular
D. As per the written statement from a ASNTLevel-III

11. A lead letter 'B' of 1/2" height and 1/16" thickness was used on a radiographic set up what is the purpose of
it.
A. To monitor the penetration ability of the X-ray beam
B. To check the density of the film
C. To find the back scatter on the film
D. To find the quality of the film

12. Which of the 'B' image on a radiographic film is not acceptable

A. A black image
B. A white image
C. A dark image
D. A gray image

13. A pipeline has got mixed grades of material with A53 Gr.B and Al06 Gr.B. It was decided to increase the
operating temperature to 450°F
A. Increase the number of TML on the system
B. The system should be monitored for two months and establish the number of TML
C. The number of TML need not be changed
D. Carry out visual inspection frequently

14. The MPI procedure should describe about which of it

A. The continuous magnetic method
B. The maximum prod spacing of 4"
C. The powder used shall be approved by API
D. The technique used shall be approved by API

15. The bolt hole size of a weld neck flange 12" dia 1500#
A. 51.4 mm
B. 53.98 mm
C. 53.00 mm
D. 54.98 mm

16. A flange material of A182 Gr.F1 of what class will be required for operating pressure of 1000 psi @ 400°F
A. 600 #
B. 900#
C. 300 #
D. 400 #

17. What would be the maximum operating pressure of a flange A182 Gr.F2 400# at 500°F
A. 590 psi
B. 570 psi
C. 516 psi
D. 450 psi

18. As soon as the completion of the inspection activities on a piping system what the inspector should do
A. Review the records and adjust the inspection frequency
B. Review the records and find the corrosion rate
C. Issue the recommendations and findings
D. Consider the average corrosion rate

19. Out of long and short-term corrosion rate whkh on~ will bA used for MAWPcalculation
A. I he corrosion rdte which leads Lo lonYl~streln,JIIl1nylire
B. The corrosion rate which leads to shorkst reillaining :ife
c. The corrosion rate which leads to reflects the current process
D. Consider the lowest corrosion rate

20. While dning welding repair on a system in ser'viCf~the inspect'ir should access the sys,:em'n {)l':ordarL~ :.0

A. APT publ.2201
0, l' PI RP 574-
L. ;IP! RP 5/'8
D. /\SfvlE Sec. VIII Di'/'::;ion-1

21. What is the down stream limit of an injection point fDr re(Jular inspection
pag~ 2 of 10
API 570 D~e.20Q4 ex~m Moh'n i<.aj
108. What is the MAWP of the system?

A. 864.07 psig
B. 86.407 psig
C. 664.7 psig
D. 66.47 psig
Section/page Reference Publication, _

109. Can a 5 year inspection interval be performed?

A. Yes because the MAWP at the next inspection is 864.07 psig

B. Yes because the MAWP at the next inspection Is 664.07 psig
C. Yes because the MAWP at the next inspection is 66.47 psig
D. No because the MAWP at the next Inspection is 564 psig

Section/page Reference Publicatlon, _

110. What is the minimum required thickness of the system listed above?

A. 1.312"
B. 1.112"
C. 0.997"
D. 0.650"
Section/page Reference Publication. _

111. Calculate the long term corrosion rate of the system listed above based on: 5 year interval: third cycle.

A. 0.023"
B. 0.021"
C. 0.112"
D. 0.997"
Section/page Reference Publication _

112. Calculate the short term corrosion rate of the system listed above, based on

t previous = 1.112"
t last = 0.997"
5 year interval: third cycle

A. 0.023"
B. 0.021"
C. 0.112"
D. 0.997"
Section/page Reference Publication _

113. Calculate the remaining life of the system listed above.

A. Less than 1 year

B. 5 years
C. 10 years
D. 15 years

Section/page Reference Publication _

A. 0.030"
B. 0.060"
C. 0.130"
D. 0.310"

S,;ction/page ' _ Rderpwe Publication -------

95. The person responsible to the owner-user for activities involving design, engineering review, analysis or evaluation
of piping systems covered by API 570 is a(n) _

A. Piping engineer
B. Repair organization
C. inspector
D. operator

Section/page Reference Publication, _

96. The person responsible to the owner-user for determining that the requirements of API 570 for inspection,
examination, and testing are met is a(n)

A. Piping engineer
B. Repair organization
C. API Authorized Piping Inspector
D. Operator

Section/page Reference Publication _

97. In compliance with API 570, who has control of the activities relating to the rerating, repair, and alteration of its
piping systems?

A. Repair organization
B. Operations
C. Owner-user inspection organization
D. Maintenance craftsmen

Section/page Reference Publication, _

98. Terminology for weld metal in excess of the specified weld size.

A. Weld reinforcement
B. Good weld technique
C. Weld toe
D. Weld throat

Section/page Reference Publication _

99. Which valve is used to automatically prevent backflow?

A. Gate valve
B. Globe valve
C. Check valve
D. Slide valve

Section/page ~ Reference Publication, _

100. Designated areas on piping systems where periodic inspections and thickness measurements are conducted are
called _

A. TP
B. TML
C. MT
D. PT

Section/page ~ Reference Publication _

1~t.

A. The coating
B. The flange face finish
C. The flange identification
D. -;he f!.Jng~

Section/page __ ,_, _______ Reference Publir:ation ~ _

Section/page Reference publication _

78. Who shall provide the materials, equipment, quality control, and workmanship necessary to maintain and repair the
piping systems in accordance with the requirements of API 570?

A. Piping engineer
B. Repair organization
C. inspector
D. operator

Section/page Reference publication. _

79. What is the proper dimension for a cross section which is to be subjected to a Charpy V-notch impact test?

A. 1/2" square
B. 10 M square
C. 10 mm square
D. 0.505" square

Section/page Reference publication _

80. When inspecting piping in an operating unit, protective equipment shall be worn when required by regulation or by:

A. The inspector judgment

B. The owner
C. The fire department
D. This is not a requirement

Section/page Reference Publication. _

81. A pipe welder successfully passes a 6 GR pipe test, the welder is qualified to weld which of the following

A. Pipe groove welds

B. Fillet welds on pipe
C. Anything that can be welded
D. 6 GR is not recognized by ASME

Section/page Reference Publication _

82. In compliance with API 570, potable water follows U.S practice which allows:

A. 2,500 parts per million maximum chloride

B. less than 1 part per million maximum chloride
C. 250 parts per million maximum chloride
D. There is no maximum chloride requirement

Section/page Reference Publication. _

83. When the United States Coast Guard requires a system to be pressured tested, care should be taken to avoid
_____ " if the system is subject to thermal expansion.

A. Under pressure
B. Excessive pressure
C. Pneumatic pressure testing is required in this situation
D. Pipe "shrinkage"

Section/page ~ Reference Publication _

'~1-. r-!"'·r"":~\ :'C' -, "tl .~~: ~:t ":""r'~ ~'_J~'~ 2': :ii"~r:,""rll' '/ IY:' ':h:-llt be j ;.--!,~,~r.',_;n~r"~":;:-!·-lr!(' '"_~~0f'j 4-h('

indication in excess of

A. Linear indications less than 1/16" long

B. Rounded indications 3/16" in diameter
C. Three relevJnt rourc'ed indir:ation in a line separated by ~,/8
D. ,'\ n'!evant linear :ndication

API S10 Model que~tion-3 Page ·1 of :)

64. A term which indicates that a provision is neither required nor prohibited.

A. must
B. may
C. shall
D. should

Section/page Reference Publication _

65. If a weld ment is allowed to cool prior to heat treatment, the rate of cooling shall be -----

A. Controlled
B. 50°F per hour to ambient
C. lOooF per hour to ambient
D. Water cooled immediately

Section/page Reference Publication, _

66. Wet magnetic particle examination shall not be performed if the surface temperature of the part exceeds

A. lOOoC
B. 40°F
C. Manufacturer's temperature limitations
D. 135°F

Section/page Reference publication _

67. When it is necessary to verify the adequacy or direction of the magnetizing field, shall be used.

A. A pie-shaped magnetic particle field indicator

B. A polarized lens type indicator
C. A florescent light with appropriate safety shield
D. Iron powder in a non-aqueous base

Section/page Reference Publication _

68. The joint efficiency of an in-service piping system is less than 1, corrosion was found, along the long seam of the
pipe, using ultrasonic inspection techniques. The corrosion rates require the piping to be rejected. However, if the
joint efficiency were increased the system would be acceptable

A. It is not possible to increase the joint efficiency for existing piping systems
B. The system may be radiographed to accordance with ASME B 31.3 and the joint efficiency increased.
C. The system may be ultrasonically inspected in accordance with ASME B 31.3 and the joint efficiency
increased
D. Both Band C

Section/page Reference Publication _

69. Thickness testing of small connections such as nipples can be performed by -----

A. UT digital gauges
B. MT
C. PT
D. H3mmer testing

Section/page ________________ Reference Publication

10. ullderground piping, 8 ft. below grade is excavated for inspectkln:

A. An "intelligent pig" must be used

B. A remote video camera must be used
C. NACE RP 0169 must be refcn-ed
D. The sides of the trervh should be sr.or,;d

Fage 2 of 5
,\PI :dO ~~odel qucstion-3
49. Who shall have the overall responsibility for compliance with API 570 and for establishing requirements for
inspection, repair, alteration and rerating?

A. Piping engineer
B. Repair organization
C. inspector
D. Owner/user

Section/page Reference Publication, _

50. During a procedure qualification test on pipe that is 3/8 inches thick, how many side bends are required if the face
and root bends are acceptable?

A. 1
B. 2
C. 4
D. None

Section/page Reference Publication, _

51. As a standard technique, the temperature of the penetrant and the surface of the part to be processed shall not be
below _

A. 125°F
B. 50°F
C. 32°F
D. 81°C
Section/page Reference Publication _

52. Small bore piping is piping that is less than -------

A. NPS 2
B. NPS 3
C. Or equal to NPS 2
D. NPS 6

Section/page Reference Publication, _

53. Excess water washable penetrant shall be removed with a water spray. The water pressure shall not exceed

A. 110 PSI
B. 90 PSI
C. 50 PSI
D. 20 PSI
Section/page Reference Publication, _

54. The intent of B 31.3 is to set forth engineering requirement deemed necessary for safe design and

A. Construction of tank installations

B. Construction of piping installations
C. Construction of vessel installations
D. Construction of bridge installations

55. Flushing the surface with solvent, following the appiication of the penetrant and prior to developing is

A. The ,)verage PT tec~.'lique

:3. Allow2d if sufficient ;;olvent is ;;, lilable
C. Not mentioned in ASME ~ection V

Paqe 4 of 5
C. 16.50"
D. 18.00"

Section/page Reference Publication, _

35. If the soil resistivity is 6,500 ohm-em, what is the inspection interval for buried piping without cathodic protection?

A. 10 years
B. 15 years
C. 5 years
D. Whenever a leak is suspected

Section/page Reference Publication. _

36. The ammeter on each piece of magnetizing equipment shall not deviate by more than ------

A. 30%
B. 10%
C. 20%
D. 15%

Section/page Reference Publication _

37. A welder is tested on V2 inch thick pipe in the 5G position. How many face bends are required for this test?

A. 1
B. 2
C. 3
D. 4

Section/page Reference Publication _

38. What is the minimum operating temperature that normalized A 516 Grade 70 plate can be used without impact
testing?

A. -29°F
B. -20°F
C. -50°F
D. OaF

Section/page Reference Publication. _

39. Bellow expansion joints should be inspected visually for:

A. misalignment
B. thickness
C. weight
D. coating thickness

Section/page Reference Publication. _

40. A welder is tested on 1/2 inch thick plate, how many face bends are required for this test?

A. 1
B. 2
C. 3
D. 4

41. During the final four h0urs of buried piping test, which was repressured to 125 PSI, the gauge feil ~ PSI

A. The piping system fniled

B. The :)i[;ing system ,]<:Jssed
C. The test n'ust be r"~peJted
D. The piping 5ystt>l11must be vis;ja:ly inspected
API570~REPARATORY
_~arcxCft'ft'-"l:RrSed:Bo01C'=--:-~=c-:-~""7=-===--~=-::===7==~-:---:-===-~-o-
r -:-·-':·0

Instructions:
Choose only one answer, which you think is most appropriate.
Use the attached answer sheet in answering the following questions.

1. Which of the following statement is correct?

a. Soil resistivity is a measure of resistance offered by soil to drilling
operation for oil exploration and it has no connection with corrosivity of
soil.
b. Lower soil resistivity indicates less corrosive soil.
c. Soil resistivity has nothing to do with corrosiveness of soil because soil
corrosion depends on the amount of corrosive chemicals present in the
soil.
d. Higher soil resistivity indicates less corrosive soil.

2. The shall be responsible to the owner-user for determining that the

requirements of API 570 for inspection, examination, and testing are met.
a) Piping Engineer
b) Inspector
c) Repair Organisation
d) Operating Personnel

3. Which of the following are some of the mandatory requirements for re-rating a
piping system?
a. Calculations must be performed by the piping engineer or the inspector.
b. Current inspection records shall be reviewed to verify that the piping
system is satisfactory for the proposed service conditions and that the
appropriate corrosion allowance has been provided.
c. The piping system is checked to affirm that the required pressure
relieving devices are present, are set at the appropriate pressure and
have the appropriate capacity at the set pressure.
d. All of the above

4. After completion of alterations a pressure test is/will:

a. Normally required
b. Not required at all
c. Depend on opinion of piping inspector
d. Only "a" and "c" above

5. Name a part of a piping system that thickness measurements are not normally
routinely taken:
a) Elbows
b) Expansion loops
c) Tees
d) Valves

6. Pressure decay method is:

a. A technique adopted for checkinq the leakaye in above qround pipinq
b. A technique used for checking leakage in underground piping
c. A technique used for calibration of pressure gauges
d. A technique used for releasing the overpressure in piping

7. Which of the following are aieas all piping systcms 'f'iiiich are ~~usceptibleto CUI
dl iring the range of 25°F to 2S0oF:
:J. /-11 the ()rp;J \vhich j~ belo\-/ n;IJ!~d:io:'
b. lnsu!ated areCiS below steam veilts
Co Trsul;:lted ipinf,l (~xro~,ed to t:ooijrH] ~ 0 n1i~;r

P_S_ Joshi Page 1 of 7

Closed Dook nnal Exam
d. "b"and"c"above - - ~ : _
f==--- ::_-====-=- __-~-7~ =-~~_-=-~_"='-==c-::- __-::--==:=-=""",--:--==' - ::::''7--=,,-~~,,=,~=----::-=-=----=-------=---:---=-::==--=-=---::--.,-------::-:-- -

a. Listed below are several examples of piping system. Which is class I piping for
flammable fluids?
a) Readily vaporizing on leakage
b) Slowly vaporizing on leakage
c) No significant vaporization
d) All of above

9. Which of the following documents referenced in API 570 addresses hot tapping?
a. API 2201
b. API 574
c. ASME B 31 G
d. None of the above

10. The preferred method for inspecting piping coating is:

a. Visual inspection only
b. Holiday detection
c. M.P. Check
d. D.P. Check

11. For which of the following, the approval from piping engineer is not mandatory:
a. Changing the damaged flange to a new flange of same rating and
material
b Alteration on piping changing a nozzle size from one not requiring
reinforcement pad to the one requiring reinforcement pad
c. For both a and b
d. For none of the above

12. Fillet welded patches (lap patches) shall be designed by:

a) An engineer expert in corrosion
b) The inspector
c) The piping engineer
d) The repair organization

13. For a project involving piping welding at site by 10 welders, (with only one
qualified welder) procedure and 9 welders were to be qualified. In this case,
identify correct statement from the following:
a. 9 welders qualification must be performed before procedure qualification.
b. 9 welders qualification must be performed after procedure qualification is
carried out using qualified welder.
c. Out of Welder qualification and procedure qualification, anything can be
performed before.
d. Welder qualification and procedure qualification must be performed
simultaneously, without waiting for the test results.

14. Guided bend test represents:

a. Ductility of weld
b. Strength of weld
c. Soundness of weld
d. both soundness and ductility of weld

15. All positions of groove welds are qualified by

a. Pipe positions lG and SG
b. P;pe positicns 2G and 5G
c. ?ipe po~,ition 5G and 3G
d. l'IOf:\? or the ,11> 've

P.S. Joshi Page 2 of 7

Clo,ed Boot rinal Exam
_____~ ~~._~ Accor~ing
---
10
ASME_~~. Ix,_~_we~_~J~_ S~_AW_~~~_
r .~- - -. - --m-mmUfn~e~ - - - -.- - - - .. -
b~=~~alified by following-
- - - - -- - . --..- -- ------
a. 1 tensile and 2 bend tests
b. 2 bend tests
c. 2 tensile tests and 1 bend tests
d. 1 tensile and 1 radiography

17. Identify incorrect statement from following

a. A welder performing procedure test is also qualified in that position.
b. Supplementary essential variables become essential variables when
impact test is specified.
c. For procedure qualification, the test can be performed in any position as
the position is not essential variable for procedure qualification.
d. A 3G welder qualified in SMAW process can be employed for TIG welding
also in that position.

18. Procedure Qualification Record is a document which can be revised time to time.
a. True
b. False
c. Depends on company policy
d. Depends on client of the company

19. Use of Radiography is made for:

a. Performance qualification only
b. Procedure qualification only
c. Both a and b
d. Use of radiography is not permitted by ASMESee. IX.

20. When dial-type indicating and recording pressure gauges are used to monitor
leak testing, the maximum gauge range shall not exceed which multiple of the
expected test pressure?
a. 1 1/2 times
b. 2 1/2 times
c. 3 times
d. 4 times

21. A radiographic technique in which radiation passed through two walls and both
the walls are viewed on the same radiograph (double wall, double image -
ellipse) the limitation for the outside diameter is:
a. 3-1/2"
b. 2"
c. 4"
d. Any diameter possible

22. Following data is available to compute remaining life of a piping circuit:

Minimum required thickness = 0.422 in
Actual thickness measured = 0.512 in
Corrosion rate = 0.018 in / year

Remaining life for this ciroJit will he:

d. 5.0 years
b. 4.5 years
c. 6.0 years
d. None of above

) '. CD:r:t1'1011 lc)c,lin'iS wLich ;:Jre:usc-,;ptlb!,:. 10 CUT '.Ill the i ;:',,1::lh,(j :)ipirg 0(8:
a. 1\11 penetrations or breaches ill Lie insulation Jacketing such as vents,
d r.~i·tis! p j !)i n~J ha! 1~'d2(,:;

Closed Book finat fxotll P.S. Joshi Page 3 of 7

b. TerminatiOn of insulation at flanges
----.--.- -=-·_=_~-.,._=_7~=:'_=_~-===_::_=_""'-:
-_---~c=~:=_~=-AlrmsUlafetfMn-dS'"aITEl=e15-oWS='- -=-=_ ..:-=",-=,.-,:,.~~=-='_.
d. a and b above

24. The accuracy of a piece of magnetizing equipment that is equipped with an

ammeter shall be verified:
a. Each year
b. Each two years
c. When possible
d. Every 6 months

25. The WPS and the PQRare used to determine:

a. If the welder is able to deposit sound weld metal.
b. If the welder is able to operate welding equipment.
c. The welder's ability to produce welds that are radiographically free of
defects.
d. If a weldment has the required properties for the intended application
(strength, ductility)

26. Which of the following penetrant system is generally considered least sensitive?
a. Water-washable - visible dye.
b. Solvent removable - visible dye.
c. Water-washable - fluorescent dye.
d. Post-emulsification - visible dye.

27. As soon as possible after completing an inspection, the Inspector should:

a. Review the inspection records and schedule the next
inspection
b. Always require a hydrotest
c. Sign all RT records
d. Notify the Piping Engineer

28. The nondestructive examination method to be used for a particular inspection

should be determined by the:
a. Availability of certified NDE examiners.
b. Length of time since the last inspection.
c. Age of the component to be inspected.
d. Type, location, and orientation of the expected flaws.

29. To verify satisfactory PWHT the test conducted is:

a. Radiography
b. Ultrasonic
c. Hardness survey
d. None of above

30. In visual testing for qualifying the procedure, a defect of which minimum width
shall be used:
a. 1/16"
b. 1/8"
c. 1 IT)"
d. None of the above

31. Visual examiner should pass Jaeger J-l check:

lJ. Annually
b. Six monthiy
r. Or~~e in 3 ,!P,~i-S
d. f'J~·)ri2 of j"1',--11bu'/;::

P .s. loshi Page 4 of 7

32. The pressure gauges for leak testing sh~ll: b·e calibrat~!J_~~_·~S~~~.~~., _~__. . ~_
:c~~--:"~·=-===reqwememi -at -I east:- - -- -- - -:--::--:-o-.-='==-=- .'::-"""='-:;:--- -_-~--:-o-=--::--::--=-::-,--:--::-- ::--. ::--:::----::-::--- ..,....

a. Every six months

b. Everyone year
c. Every three years
d. None of the above

33. It is decided to carryout a surface NDT for austenitic S.s. pipe welds. Choose
the best combination.
a. Penetrant testing with Halogen free developer
b. Penetrant testing with any aqueous developer
c. Magnetic particle testing with wet particles
d. Magnetic particle testing with dry particles

34. In ultrasonic testing, for thickness measurement on corroded surface, use:

a. CRT read out
b. Digital read out
c. Any of above
d. None of above.

35. An example of service-specific corrosion is:

a) Corrosion under insulation in areas exposed to steam vents
b) Unanticipated acid or caustic carryover from processes into non-alloyed
piping
c) Corrosion in deadlegs
d) Corrosion of underground piping at soil-to-air interface

36. When a pressure test is not necessary or practical, what shall be utilised in lieu
of a pressure test?
a) PMI Testing
b) Non-destructive examination
c) Vacuum visual examination
d) Hammer Testing

37. For which of the following can yoke technique be used?

a. Sub-surface cracks
b. Surface cracks
c. Both a and b
d. For none of a and b

38. The pipe welding test position in which the pipe is horizontal and rotated so that
welding takes place at or near the top is designated as?
a. 2 G
b. 5 G
c. 3 G
d. 1 G

39. API 578 gives rules for Alloy Verification for:

a. Carbon steel piping material for old or new piping
b .. Allo\! srppl !,i!,il1rJ IY1;:1tpri;ll<;: Fi)r nlri "'" >1'>\-'1 ri~;"g
c. Carbon steel materials used for old piping only
d. Alloy steels used for old piping only

40. :::or thickness measurement of pipes NPS t and smaller, NDT technique employed
would be:
Ultrasonic technique
b. r~'..Jdj(\~Jrdphlc prohle ~.f:?(hnJcl' i{~

c. ;\nynne is okay.
d. "':..~'r:t-j drc ck;JY.

Closed Book Final Exam P.S. Joshi Page 5 of 7

~-~===4J:':----=-1\PI-=meq ulfe"S7aT1~ast~=====-===~m<Jdes:::-to 15-e=PJVtl=tEsterr'froflT-=ecH:IT1mxi..:c--=-==-,~"-
a. one
b. two
c. minimum 10%
d. all

42. Which of the following make pipe system most susceptible to CUI?
a. Painted pipes operating at 1500 F
b. Insulated pipes operating at 1500 F
c. Projections, penetrations in "a"
d. Projections, penetrations in "blf

43. Freeze damage can occur in case of which of the following fluids:
a. Water only
b. Oil only
c. Water and aqueous solutions
d. None of the above

44. For calculating MAWP of Piping Circuit which is put in service the wall thickness
used in computations is:
a. Actual thickness as determined by inspection.
b. Actual thickness minus the estimated corrosion loss before the
date of next inspection
c. Actual thickness minus twice the estimated corrosion loss
before the date of next inspection
d. None of the above

45. When checking austentic materials for cracks using PT methods only liquid
penetrants:
a. with low or no nitrides should be used
b. with low or no carbides should be used
c. with high or medium chlorides should be used
d. with low or no chlorides should be used

46. As per API 570 for bolted flanged joints, bolts and nuts are considered as
acceptably engaged if the lack of complete engagement is:
a. Not more than two threads
b. Not more than one thread
c. Bolts and nuts are engaged at least 50% of threads in the nuts
d. Bolts shall completely extend through nuts

47. Basic construction code referred in API 570 is:

a. ASME Sec. VIII, Div. 1
b. ASME Sec. IX
c. ASME B 31.1
d. ASME B 31.3

48. For a typical "injection point pipe circuit starts upstream of injection point from
ll

a distance of
a. 3 times pjp{~ diameter or 12 inches which ever is greater
b. 2 times pipe diameter or 12 inches which ever is gr,~ater
c. Fixed 12 inches irrespective of pipe diameter
d. 3 times pipe di3nletl-,r or 12 inches whichever is smaller

49. For MT examination by Prod t(~(hnj(r Ie the s1'acing behwoen prods shall be

a. 'f indl'~s '0 1/ ipc es

Closed Book Final Exam P.S. Joshi Page 6 of 7

c. 3 inches to 10 inches -
~-~-:===::--7-::----:---=- - --cr. -3 mcm:s- to tHntlles - --

50. API 578 Material Verification can be applied for:

a. New and in-service carbon steel piping
b. New and in-service alloy piping
c. Only in service carbon steel piping
d. Only for in-service alloy piping

Closed Bock Final Exam P_S_ Joshi Pag e 7 of 7

----.. _-
_. - -------------------------
.. .. _ . _ -=--=-=-"7------= _-:----:--:--7 _-- . --::-.--:..-~--=--==- --::
~

T A C Inspect-on T raining And Consulting

londestructive Examination Quiz

-;.;:(!.;;

. tests leave the test object unchanged and ready to be placed in service if acceptable a. Destructive
. Nondestructive c. Bend
a1L-l)fthe above
)
n, _..:of the above

inspection is considered to be the primary nondestructive test method.

Penetrant b. Ultrasonic
Magnetic particle d. Visual
none ofthe above

Visual inspection must be performed: a. before welding b. during welding c. after welding
a11of the above
none of the above

tests reveals surface discontinuities by the bleedout of a penetrating medium against a contrasting background. a. Penetrant b. Ultrasonic
Magnetic particle d. Visual
none of the above

AC API 570 NDE Summary, Fan, 2001 Page 5 -II

5.llie··vIsiBle aye used in PT produces a vivid indicatibnagainst a white background ..
a. .gr..~enisb~,b. re<;l
c. neutral n
•••••••• n ~ •••••••

d. all of the above

e. none of the above

6. The fluorescent dye used in PT produces a fluorescent indication against a light background when observed under
an ultraviolet light. a. greenish b. red
c. neutral
d. all of the above
e. none of the above

7PT .nd,;;;'-::,:' .WI not etect., a. surface indications b. cracks

:::.overlap
i..all of the above
~. none of the above

~. The method is used to discover surface or slightly subsurface discontinuities in ferromagnetic materials. a. penetrant b. ultrasonic
;. magnetic particle d. visual
~.none ofthe above

)... jen the magnetic field is oriented along the axis of the part, it is referred to as magnetism. a. circular
). diagonal
:. longitudinal
1. all of the above
:. none of the above

.0. When the magnetic field tends to surround the part perpendicular to its longitudinal axis, it is referred to as magnetism. a. circular
t. diagonal
· longitudinal
l. all of the above
· none of the above

• ,I
:A~API 570 NDE Summary, Fall, 2001 Page 5 -12

-- __;-!\II,;,.,
.
-iF{-~'i
~ .-- - -
11. A field results when the "yoke" method is used, as shown in figure 11.
a. cirt;ttlm:
-:~iagoiiar-=-~-=~~- - - -- - _.-
c. longitudinal
d. all of the above
e. none of the above

Figure II

12. A field results when the "prod" technique is used, as shown in figure 12.
a. circular ;..<...:' b. dia
gonal .1;'.
..c. longitudinal
d. all ofthe above -.- e. none ofthe above - ,.-

Figure 12

13 1e major limitation of magnetic particle testing is that it will work only on material. a. any stainless b. any copper c. any lead
d.. any ferromagnetic

14. is a nondestructive test method based on the principle of preferential radiation transmission. a Penetrant fb. Ultrasonic
:. Magnetic particle d. Visual
~. none of the above

15. The disadvantages of radiographic testing are: a. radiation exposure

). extensive safety training
:. the process may not detect laminations d. all of the above
:. none of the above

r AC API 570 J\'DE Summary, Fall, 2001 Page 5 -13

,,
.::if.-) ,..":;
16.is a nondestructive inspection method which uses high
~frequency sauna wavesIO measure:geom-etrfccam:l-physrcm==pr=o=p=e=rt~le=s~~~n=m=a=te=ri~a~l~s=-.
=...===o====~~
a. Penetrant. b. U1 trasonic
c. Magnetic particle d. Visual
e. none of the above

. I'llmtatlOn
17: A major ,. 0 fl'u trasomc testmg
.. IS t h'at It reqUITes
. ~ ~o-
a b ecause i•.•
mterpretatHm 1 leu 1t. a. comp 1ex re fierence
can b e d'ffi
gUide
b. complex standard test block c. extensive calibration tests d, skilled operator

..,-"~'.. , ,

\c APT 570 NDE Summary, Fall. 200 1 Pap,e 5 -14

JT A C Inspection Training An~- .Cons~ting

Nondestructive Examination Answer Key

••••.•• r
II'·" ",., ••

1. b 2. d 3. d 4. a 5. b 6. a 7; e 8. c 9. c 10. all. c 12. a 13. d 14. e 15. d 16. b 17. d

~rACAPI570 NDESummaryjFal1,2001 Page5-15

API 570 Quiz

==~===""==========~============~=================~=====~-=-.==~------

1. API 570 covers inspection of:

A. new construction

B. new tank construction

C. in-service piping

D. in-service vessels

2. CUI is the acronym for:

A. Corrosion Under Insulation

B. Cold Under-ground In-service piping

C. Corrosion Under Inside flow

D. Carpet Under Infra-structure

3. A person who assists the inspector by performing specific NDEon piping systems is termed:

A. NDE technician K

B. Inspector assistant

C. Level.II inspector

D. Examiner

4. The response or evidence resulting from the application of a non-destructive evaluation technique is
termed:

A. A crack

B. Porosity

C. A leak

D. An indication

5. The MAWPis:

A. The maximum internal pressure permitted in the piping system.

B. The minimum internal pressure permitted in the piping system.

C. The maximum external pressure permitted in the piping system.

D. The maximum '~xternal stress permitted in the piping system.

6. A section of piping encompassed by flanges or other connectirig rttings is c:~I!p.d:

i\. A fli:Jr1gr;d r:;ipe

B. A ready to be installed pipe

(:. A spuuied piece

,j !\II f uUlOi'izcd Piping Inspector

B. A piping inspector
C. A NDE Leve11ior III in any technique

8. A TML is:

A. Thickness Material Laboratory

B. Taiwan Made Label

C. Thickness Measurement Location

D. Time Medium Length

9. The result of excessive cyclic stresses that are often well below the static yield strength of the material is
. titled:

A. material failure

B. fatigue cracking

C. failure cracking

D. creep cracking

10. Thickness measurements may be taken by ultrasonic instruments or what other method:

A. AET

B. ET

C. MT

D. RT

11. Which of the following tests are not normally conducted as part of a routine inspection:

A. UT Thickness

B. Visual inspection

C. Radiographic profile

D. Pressure tests

12. Thickness measurements are not routinely taken on in piping circuits.

A. Valves

B. Straight run pipe

C. FittingS

D. deadlegs

13. During the installation of a flanged connection, the bolts should:

A. Extend two threads past their nuts.

B. Extend completely through their nuts.
C. Extenrl only hi1lf w"y through thpir nuts.
lJ. lXLel:U dl',dSI .) Illci:,!s (,l.L::> 1111:/)past their flU ..S.

14. Services with the highest potential of resulting in an immediate emergency r if a leak were to occur are
in:

.4.. Class 3

B. Class 2

15. The classification that includes 1:1::= majority of unit process piping is labelled:

A. Class 3
B. Oass 2

D. Owner/user designated system

16. Services that are flammable but do not significantly vaporize when they leak -and are not located in
high activity areas:
A. Class 3
B. Class 2
C. Class 1
D. Owner/user designated system

17. What is the remaining life in years of a piping system whose corrosion rate is 0.074 inches per year, the
actual wall thickness is 0.370 inches and the minimum required thickness is .1 inches?
A. 36.48 years
B. 364.8 years
C. 3.6 years
D. 3.6 months
18. What is the long term corrosion rate of a piping circuit that started at 0.375 inches and is now 0.1 inch,
the measurements be taken over a five year period-
A. 0.5S inches per year
B. 0.005 inches per year
C. 0.550 inches per year
D. Not enough information given

19. What is the short term corrosion rate of the above piping circuit.

A. O.OSS.inches per year

B. 0.005 inches per year

C. 0.5S0 inches per year

D. Not enough information given

20. A longitudinal crack in an existing piping circuit may be repaired by:

A. installing a full encirclement welded split sleeve
B. welding over the crack
C. welding a box over the" cracked area
D. using a full encirclement welded split sleeve, with the approval of the piping engineer
~-------~=="~==========,====----=-----~-.~-----

API 570 Quiz Answer Key

1. C Paragraph 1.1.1
2. A Paragraph 3.8

3. Paragraph 3.12

4. D Paragraph 3.15 corrosion rate

5. A Paragraph 3.21 [inches (millimeters) per year]
6 ... C Paragraph 3.43
7; D Paragraph A.2.1 tal= the actual minimum thickness, in 8. C Paragraph 3.47 ~~hes (millimeters),
determined at the 9. B Paragraph 5.3.9 time of inspection. 10. D Paragraph 5.6
11. D Paragraph 5.7 t .ed = the required thickness, in
12. A Paragraph 5.9 ~~s (millimeters), for the limiting 13. B Paragraph 5.11 section or zone. 14. C
Paragraph 6.2.115. B Paragraph 6.2.2 16. A Paragraph 6.2.3

18. A Paragraph 7.1.1 The long term (L. T.) corrosion rate:

Corrosion rate (L. T .) = t initial -t actual

time (years) between initial

and actual inspections 19. A Paragraph 7.1.1 The short term (5. T.) corrosion rate:

Corrosion rate (5. T .) = t previous -t actual

time (years) between previous

and actual inspections 20. D Paragraph 8.1.3.1

Remaining life (years)= t actual- t required

Where: -
--------------------------------===~==-===============-----,====~~---,----- -
API 570 TRAINING COURSE
Exam 2 (Closed Book)

Note: Tick only one alternative, which you think is most appropriate.

1. As per ASME 31.3, the increased quality factors by conducting additional NDT
is permitted for:
a. ERW pipes
b. Seamless pipes
c. Electric fusion welded pipes
d. All types of pipes

2. The thickness formula t=PD/2 (SE+PY) is valid only if pipe thickness as

fraction of pipe outside diameter (D) is:
a. Thickness < D/4
b. Thickness:::; D/6
c. Thickness < D/6
d. Thickness:::; D/4

3. For impact testing of pipe materials Code B 31.3 stipulates average value for
3 specimen, however a lower than average value (but higher than minimum
stipulated) may be accepted for one specimen. This acceptance criteria is
valid for:
a. Absorbed energy criteria only
b. Lateral expansion criteria only
c. Valid for both a and b
d. Depends on decision of piping engineer

4. Pneumatic test is to be conducted using ASME31.3 methodology on piping

having Design pr = 200 psig. Which of the following meet the methodology of
ASME B 31.3 as regards test pr, inspection pr, and safety valve pressure
respectively,
a. 250 psig, 200 psig, 275 psig respectively
b. 220 psig, 200 psig, 240 psig respectively
c. 220 psig, 200 psig, 245 psig respectively
d. None of the above

5. A piping is to be pneumatically tested at test pr = 80 psig. What will the

pressure at which a preliminary leak check shall be performed.
a. 40 psig
b. 20 psig
c. 25 psig
d. 80 psig

6. Pre-heating, whenever specified is:

a. Applicable to strength welds and not for tack welds
b. Strength welds and seal welds only
r L:~r(:>nr~th \No1d,,; t-;=t'-k '.-'!pl,k ."r-d .-.p;:;1 ",.'1,1.::
d. Strength welds only

7. For pressure testing of piping systems, which of the following statement(s)

att;(.orrect?

p,s. ]0S"i
a. Hazard of released energy is higher in case of hydrostatic test since
Hydrostatic pressure is 50% higher than design pr while pneumatic
pressure is only 10% higher.
b. For hydrotesting water alone can be used.
c. Pneumatic test shall be conducted only if hydrostatic test is impracticable.
d. a and c above

8. If stresses produced during hydrostatic test exceed the yield stress of

material, hydrostatic test pressure shall be:
a. 1.5 times the design pr multiplied by stress ratio
b. The pressure limited by yield strength of material
c. The lower of a and b
d. Higher of a and b

9. Which of the following ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code sections are
referenced in API 5707
a. ASME Section V
b. ASME Section IX
c. A and b above
d. All of above

10. Code B 31.3 stipulates acceptance criteria for NDT method/. In D.P. Check
length of "indication" for the certain discontinuity was seen as 4 mm but
after the D.P. Check and after cleaning by using magnifying glass it was
seen having actual length as 2.5mm only. Evaluation shall be done
considering which of the following.
a. The Size of indication 4mm
b. The actual size of discontinuity 2.5 mm
c.Higher of (a) and (b)
d. Lower (a) and (b)

11. The Term 'S' used in formula for calculating thickness of permanent blinds
as per 31.3 code, represents.
a. Safe stress Value of pipe materials
b. Safe stress value of blind materials
c. Lower of (a) and (b)
)
d. Higher a. and b.

12. Code B 31.3 recommends and mandates min, required pre-heat temp, for
welding of pipes. When do the recommendations become mandatory?
a. At ambient temperature above 0 deg C
b. At ambient temperature above 10 deg C
c. At ambient temperature below 10 deg C
d. At ambient temperature below 0 deg C

13. If Two pipes different pre- heat requirements say t1 and tz are to be welded l
the pre- hezlt for their joining
shall be (t1 and tz are in 0c)
d. riiYller Uf 1.:1 and tJ2
b. Lower cl'tOl dlid t02
c. Average of t l and tOz
O

d. None of above.

Closed Rock ·2
P.S. Joshi Paye 2 {jf 3
14. Code B 31.3 require standard mill tolerance to be added to calculated pipe
thickness. The standard negative mill - tolerance as percentage of nominal
thickness is:
a. 10%
b. 15%
c. 12Y2%
d. None of these

15. For 8" ND Sch 40 and 8" ND Sch 80 pipes l

a. ID for both pipes will be same

b. 00 for both pipes will be same
c. IDs and ODs for both pipes will be different
d. Average pipe diameters for both will be same
16. Two pipes (A) and (B) of different materials and schedules are to be
welded. The PWHT Required for pipe (A) is 1100° F min. for 2 hr min. for pipe
(B) 13000F min for I hr. what will be PWHT min. temp and min. time for the
weld joint of (A) and (B)

a. 1100° F and 1 hr.

b. 1100° F and 3 hr.

c. 13000 F and 1 hr.

d. 1300° F and 2 hr.

17. Which of the following types of discontinuities is not normally detected by
radiography?
a. Cracks
b. Incomplete penetration
c. Laminations
d. Slag

18. ASME B 31.3 code is meant for new piping installations in:
a. Steam piping in Power stations
b. Piping in Refinery and process plants
c. Cross-country piping
d. Gas transmission piping

19. In a certain arc welding process coalescence of metals is produced

l

by an arc between a tungsten electrode and the work, and

shielding is obtained from a gas or gas mixture. filler metal mayor
may not be used. this process is called:
a. FCAW.
b. GMAW.
c. GTAW.
d. SAW.

20. API 570 gives rules for:

a. repairs and alteration of metallic pipes only
b. repairs and alteration of metallic & non-metallic pipes.
c. In-service inspection of IY12tlllic & nonmetallic pipr~s.
d. oil of above.

p, S. Joshi P;:J:ge J of 3
-------------.------. _.===~~~=~--~,=.:=-===-==========~~~~~~=-~~--~~-------------.---::.--

API 570 PREPARATORY COURSE

Exam 2 - Closed Book
ANSWER KEY

Q. NO. ANSWER Q. NO. ANSWER

1 C 27
2 C 28
3 A 29
4 B 30
5 C 31
6 C 32
7 C 33
8 C 34
9 C 35
10 A 36
11 B 37
12 D 38
13 A 39
14 C 40
15 B 41
16 D 42
17 C 43
18 B 44
19 C 45
20 A 46
21 -------------------------- 47
22 48
23 49
24 50
25 51
26 52
.. - -- _ .. - . -. -. - _. ----- - __ ..._ - - _, .. __ - __ ._' '_.0_- .. _ .. .. . , __. . _

-.
=============- -
- ~....:..:..----,. ' _ ...c-' -.-----"-'---- .=. ., ..• _._. .. -'"- .-'-- ,_ •__.. -_-'-_'-'-"'~_-'-- "--_...o. _--'--'--"""'- .: ._

API 570 PREPARATORY COURSE

Exam 2A (Closed Book)

Note: Tick only one alternative Which you think is most appropriate.

1. Which of the following is true of "Dead legs" in a piping system

a. NDT cannot be done on dead legs
b. A portion of the piping which has fallen out of the test system
c. The corrosion rate can very significantly from adjacent piping
d. None of the above

2. Which of the following is a description of a "repair organization"?

a. An owner or user of piping systems who repairs or alters his or her own
equipment in accordance with API 570
b. A contractor whose qualifications are acceptable to the owner or user of
piping systems and who makes repairs or alterations according to API 570
c. One who is authorized by, acceptable to, or otherwise not prohibited by
the jurisdiction and who makes repairs or alterations according to API 570
d. All of the above

3. What does the acronym CUI represent?

a. Cracking Under Insulation
b. Covered Under Insurance
c. Corrosion Under Insulation
d. Corrosion Under Inspection

4. Repair on piping system would

a. Restore piping to intended design conditions
b. Change the design conditions
c. Require re-rating to be carried out
d. None of the above

5. Which of the following best describes auxiliary piping?

a. Any piping which is extra to the main piping run can be considered as
auxiliary piping.
b. Instrument and machinery piping, typically small bore secondary process
piping that can be isolated from primary piping system.

c. Any piping which is less than 1.0 inch N.S

d. All of the above

6. Post weld heat treatment is carried out:

a. To increase Hardness
b. To increase Tensile strength
c. To release locked-up stresses in the weld and improve ductility
d. None of the above

'7 Tn rasp nf nir;infl rr:quirinq P\NHT [Jrpsc;I Irp J.p.,/-k rondll('tpd

a. Before PWHT
b. After PWHT and before painting
c. After PWHT and painting
d. Anytime is okay

3. Ga',ic 'cw;tr'JCticn code rr~fern~rl 1:1/\PI '70 is

.1. ;\';jvl/-: SlX. VIn DlV 1
b. ASME Sec. IX
'. \S~!)I--:B31.1

Closed Book 2A P.S. Joshi rage 1 of 3

- ----.-------.--- _. -.--. -- - --- --.--.- ------ ------.-
.. .. -----.--.---.---.---.---.-- - -.--. -- - -- -.--- --- ------ - --

- ~_.- .. -.

d. ASME B 31.3

9. Which of the following defines the term hold point?

a. A pipe hanger that utilizes springs and sliding shoes to accommodate
expansion and contraction
b. A dog welded onto piping and used to align joints prior to welding
c. A point beyond which work may not proceed until inspections have been
performed and documented
d. A trunnion, gimbal, or sliding shoe used for piping support systems

10. Which of the following changes on a piping could be termed as an alteration?

a. Addition of a reinforced nozzle of size equal to an existing nozzle
b. Addition of a nozzle not requiring reinforcement
c. Any change that effect the pressure containing capacity of the piping
beyond the scope of items described in existing data reports
d. Only "b" and "c"

11. API 570 was developed for the petroleum refining and chemical process
industries.
a) It shall be used for all piping systems.
b) It may be used, where practical, for any piping system.
c) It can be used, where necessary, for power piping.
d) It may not be used unless agreed to by all parties.

12. The preferred medium for a pressure test is _

a) steam
b) air
c) water
d) hydrocarbon

13. Identity "Dead legs" form following

a. Broken or damaged pipe supports
b. Spare pump piping
c. Both of above
d. None of above

14. In API-5;'0, the term" RBI" means:

)
a. Repairing Before Inspection
b. Report Based Inspection \
c. Repair Based Inspection "
d. Risk Based Inspection

15. SjA interface is taken as zone which is:

a. 12 inches above soil
b. 12 inches below soil
c. 12 inches below and 6 inches above soil
d. a and b above

16. ?art of [Jiping installation exhibil,ng similar corrosivity and ~;.jini!i3r

design conditions is called:
a. Piping system
b. Piping Spool
c. Piping Circuit
'1. i JUlie c;f -l e dhc'/(~

Closed BQok 2A
P.S, Joshi Page 2 of 3
=.-,,_ =~_=_
=.,__ .._=._._=
..=========.=. _=.,,=
.. =.._-=~=~=_.""=-,-,-_=_=~=",
.....=-,,..._=
=- .~=_.,_=-
..,,"=._=_"_=~.=.~=.~=_,-_=_..;._=._=~=.
= =_= ="=.~=.=-'.-_..=~=.~~~__=_=,,-'~=
..+= ,=~=.. ==.,=z",," .=~=.._-:. --~-=-=---_.
..=_. _ =._..,,=~=_.~
=. ..
17. What is the minimum time that a leak test must be maintained (all joints and
connections shall be examined for leaks)?
a. 60 minutes
b. 45 minutes
c. 30 minutes
d. 10 minutes

18. TML" in API 570 means:

a. thickness monitoring line
b. Thickness measuring location
c. Thickness measurement location
d. None of the above

19. Performing impact test requires testing of a set of:

a. Three specimen
b. At least two specimen
c. Minimum three specimen
d. Maximum three specimen

20. Hot tapping is best described by statement:

a. It is technique of heating the pipe to specified temperature and gently
tapping with lib. rounded hammer to detect thinning of pipe wall
b. It is technique of providing a tapping connection while pipe system is in
operation
c. It is technique of fixing a water tap on hot water lines for use during
wi nter
d. It is an act of using the tap and die for threading the pipe when the pipe
is hot

Closed Book 2A p .s. Joshi Page 3 of 3

-~-- ---- -- -- ..•-- - - .- -.- - -.- - - - ,- - -- ---- ----- ----- -.- -- - -- - - - - --- -- -.--- - - - -- --- - ~ - _. - • __ '_n . __

-- -- .-.--- ---._- ----------

'-'=====,_=~"= __""".=.. =-_==0..,=, .=. _~=_ =_=_.=.===_"=._-=- ...=.~=.~_=.=~.=
__~=~=
__
=_=.="'_=
..=,.__
=_=~==__=
.. _=_~=_=_~~=
__=.. =~=~=~_=
__=,=,~=~=.~=_
=~=.=__"="=_=~=.
=_=~=,_=_~~
__

API 570 PREPARATORY COURSE

Exam 2A - Closed Book
ANSWER KEY

Q. NO. ANSWER Q. NO. ANSWER

1 C 27
2 D 28
3 C 29
4 A 30
5 B 31
6 C 32
7 B 33
8 D 34
9 C 35
10 C 36
11 B 37
12 C 38
13 B 39
14 D 40
15 C 41
16 C 42
17 D 43
18 C 44
19 A 45
20 B 46
21 ----------------------------- 47
22 48
23 49
24 50
25 51
26 52
570 Examination Sample Items

SAMPLE API-570 Exam Items

The items below are examples of what an exam item might look like. If you have questions
about an item or disagree with the answer, please email us at inspector@apLorq and we
will forward to one of our subject matter experts.

Correct Answer: 3

A. Which of the following are least likely to experience

corrosion under insulation (CUI)?

1. Areas subject to process spills,

moisture, and/or acid vapors
2. Areas exposed to mist from
cooling towers
3. Piping systems that operate
above 250· F
4. Areas exposed to steam vents

Correct Answer: 2

B. Which of the following descriptions best identifies

the cracks expected in corrosion observed during a
visual inspection for a chlorine leak that has been
dripping on an austenitic pipe?

1. Following the grain boundaries

2. Transgranular and branching
3. Bright and faceted
4. A pattern of carbon stringers

Correct Answer: 4

C. The preferred method for inspecting piping

injection points involves:

1. visual inspection and ultrasonics.

2. ultrasonics and/or acoustic
emission testing.
3. eddy current and/or radiography.
4. radiography and/or ultrasonir,s.

Correct Answer: 4
D. When dial-type indicating and recording pressure
gauges are used to monitor leak testing, the
maximum gauge range shalf not exceed which
multiple of the expected test pressure?

1. 1 Y:z times
2. 2 Y:z times
3. 3 times
4. 4 times

Correct Answer: 2

E. An NPS 1 Y:z level bridle on a propane storage

drum shall undergo thickness measurements:

1. at intervals not to exceed 10

years or half the remaining life,
whichever is sooner.
2. at intervals not to exceed 5 years
or half the remaining life, whichever
is sooner.
3. only when corrosion rates
exceed 5 mils per year.
4. optionally.

Correct Answer: 3

F. Inspection records contain the following information

for a particular thickness measurement location (TML)
in a return bend:

Thickness Year

0.500 o

0.425 5

0.400 10

On the basis of the information above, the long-term

cOllosinn r:lle for thr, iOCc,tintl is:

1 . 1 Y:z mils per year.

2. 5 mils per year.
3. 1() mils per year.
4. 100 mils per yeClr.
=~~==~=c~~===~========~_~=_~
_

Correct Answer: 3

G. Which of the following defines the term hold point?

1. A pipe hanger that utilizes

springs and sliding shoes to
accommodate expansion and
contraction
2. A dog welded onto piping and
used to align joints prior to welding
3. A point beyond which work may
not proceed until inspections have
been performed and documented
4. A trunnion, gimbal, or sliding
shoe used for piping support
systems

Correct Answer: 4

H. Heat treatment is required for all thicknesses of

piping over :V2 inch for which of the following
materials?

1. P Nos. 1 and 2
2. P Nos. 1 and 3
3. P Nos. 2 and 3
4. P Nos. 4 and 5

T
m

Correct Answer: 1

I. A welder has made 25 SMAW groove welds, but the guided bend test
for the welder's qualification was never performed. In order to avoid
cutting out all of the production welds made by this welder, which of the
follOWing minimum steps would be taken to validate the qualification?

1 . Radiograph the welder's first production weld and

accept the qualification based on acceptable weld
quality by radiography.
2. There is no alternative to qualifying a welder by the
guided bend test.
3. Have the welder prepare a test coupon and have
the bend test done on that.
4. Radiograph all 25 welds, regardless of the
governing specifications for sample selection.
--- - ------- --- -- - -.-.-----------.----------.------------------ ----------.----
-- ..--.- ----- - - ----- --.- - ------------- ..--.--.-------- .. --------- ---.------. - --.-.-.-.- ----- -- - -- -- -- _. -- - ._-- - _- - - - ---- - --- .
' ..

• ,- - --- --- - ---_. --.- -. --- -- - - - •. -.-- .• - •• - --- •• - -- --- _. - _ .. - • - - •• < - - .-

API 570 PREPARATORY COURSE

DAILY EXAM 3A- CLOSED BOOK

1. Which of the following are least likely to have corrosion under insulation (CUI)?
a. Areas subject to process spills, moisture, and/or acid vapors
b. Areas exposed to mist from cooling towers
c. Piping systems that operate above 2500 F .
d. Areas exposed to steam vents
2. Which of the following is typical deterioration that can take place on the external
surfaces of pipes?
a. CUI
b. Caustic embrittlement
c. Erosion
d. All of the above

3. Which of the following make pipe system most susceptible to CUI?

a. Painted pipes operating at 1500 F
b. Insulated pipes operating at 1500 F
c. Projections as penetrations in "a"
d. Projections as penetrations in "b"

4. Freezedamagecan occur in caseof whichof the followingfluids:

a. Water only
b. Oil only
c. Water and aqueous solutions
d. None of the above

5. "Actively Engaged" as an authorized piping inspector means some minimum time as

percentage of most recent 3 years shall be spent on piping inspection. This minimum
period is:
a. 25%
b. 50%
c. 20%
d. 40%

6. For a typical "injection point pipe circuit" starts upstream of injection point from a
) distance of
a. 3 times pipe diameter or 12 inches which ever is greater
b. 2 times pipe diameter or 12 inches which ever is greater
c. Fixed 12 inches irrespective of pipe diameter
d. None of the above

7. The shall be responsible to the owner-user for determining that the

requirements of API 570 for inspection, examination, and testing are met.
a) Piping Engineer
b) Inspector
c) Rppair n"n;-1ilic;;-ltinn
d) Operating Fersonnel

8. What is the best thing to do with deadlegs that are no longer

in sl~rvjce?
a) Litrdsonc-Jlly in:.:;pect u:len
- - - - - - - - - - - - .- - - - - - - - - - - --- - - - - - - -- - - - - - - - - - -- - - - _.- - - -_.- - - - - - - - - - - -. - - _. - -
-_._-. -" _._----- - - ---------- -- ---_.---- -_._- ..- - _.- - - -- - - - - - - - - - -- _.- - .-. -.--- _. - -- ..- - .-.- - ---_.- ._- - .-. -- -
..

- --.-.-.- -". n. _. __ . __ •• __ . __ ,_. . __ • •.. h

--.-----.-.--
b) Radiograph often
c) Inspect often
d) Remove them

9. If external or internal coatings or refractory liners on a piping circuit are in good

condition, what should an inspector do?

a) After inspection, remove the liner for UT chek

b) The entire liner should be removed for inspection
c) Selected portions of the liner should be removed for inspection
d) Liner need not be removed if it is found to be in sound condition

10. Where can fatigue cracking typically be first detected?

a) At points of low-stress intensification such as reinforced nozzles
b) At points of high-stress intensification such as branch connections
c) At points where cyclic stresses are very low
d) At points where there are only bending or compressive stresses

11. Who would normally report vibrating or swaying piping to engineering or inspection
personnel?
a) Operating personnel
b) Repair personnel
c) Jurisdictional personnel
d) Design personnel

12. An examiner is a person who assists the inspector

a) by conducting PMI testing
b) by conducting pressure testing
c) by conducting nondestructive testing
d) by conducting destructive testing

13. ASME B 16.5 does not cover:

a. Class 150 flanges
b. Class 300 flanged fittings
c. Butt welded-pipe elbows
d. All of the above

14. The zone for preheat shall extend (as per B31.3),
a. at least Vz/f beyond each edge of the weld
b. at least 1" beyond each edge of the weld
c. over only the weld itself
d. at a minimum 2" each side of the weld

15. A pressure test for piping, in most cases is a:

a. leak test
b. Stress test
c. ductility test
,1<:;rrpnfJrn j-,,<:;t

16. Fatigue cracking of piping systems may result from

a) embrittlement of the metal due to it operating below its transition
temperatlire
b) erosion or corro~ion / erosion that thin the; piping wherp j': cr;jcks
----- ..- -- - -- -.--.-- .-- -. - -.- .. --- ----. -- -.,.--- -- - - -- - -- - -.-,.-.-- -. - ---- - -- ---" ---- -- .. --.- ---- - - - --- -- ... -- -
"_._~-.-.-. - - - - --- --------- - -- -- d __ •

~~ ---- .. - ..- .. - .__ ._._-_ .. -- .--.-----

.. .------ ~- -~ .. _. __ __ --- ... _-_._.------ --_ _.-. -.. ...

,,~,~~, ,,~" ., -~-,,~~,~,,=. ==~~~~====~~~=======,,=. ="=.,._=,,~,,'

~'"=",,=~
=~,,=,,-=
.., ,=-.,=-=, ,=
•.=...=
...,=..=':',=.,=._=".=~=--=,-=._~=~.=-
,"=-=--.=.
,~.~
~=.:~-:-;~::;;-~-:-
-. "..,
c) excessive cyclic stresses that are often well below the static yield strength of
the material
d) environmental cracking caused by stress corrosion due to the presence of
caustic, amine, or other substance.

17. What are the preferred NDE methods for detecting fatigue cracking?
a) Eddy current testing ultrasonic A-scan testing, and / or possibly hammer
testing
b) Liquid penetrant testing, magnetic particle testing
c) Visual testing, eddy current testing and / or possibly ultrasonic testing
d) Acoustic emission testing, hydro-testing, and / or possibly ultrasonic testing

18. Water and aqueous solutions in piping systems may freeze and cause failure because
of the
a) expansion of these materials;
b) contraction of these materials
c) construction of these materials
d) decrease of these materials

19. The shall be responsible to the owner-user for the requirements for design
review, analysis, and evaluation of piping system.
a) Piping Engineer
b) Inspector
c) Repair Organisation
d) Operating Personnel

20. Why should dead legs in piping be inspected?

a) API 570 mandates the inspection of dead legs.
b) Acid products and debris build up in dead legs.
c) The corrosion rate in deadfegs can vary significantly from adjacent active
piping.
d) Caustic products and debris build up in deadlegs.

p.(!~ uf·'
- - -- -.-.--'-- -. - - - - .-.-.--- - -- -- -..- ------._-- - ----- - -----.--
.. .. ---.-- - ---.--- .. --- -'- _. - .. - --- --_. ------ ---.

- -. - - - - .. - . -- - - - - .. - - - -- - - - .. -
'

- - .- - -

API 570 PREPARATORY COURSE

Exam 3A - Closed Book
ANSWER KEY

Q. NO. ANSWER Q. NO. ANSWER

1 C 27
2 A 28
3 D 29
4 C 30
5 C 31
6 A 32
7 B 33
8 D 34
9 D 35
10 B 36
11 A 37
., 12
)
C 38
13 C 39
14 B 40
15 A 41
16 C 42
17 B 43
18 A 44
19 A 45
20 C 46
21 ------------------------------- 47
---
22 48
23 49
24 50
25 51
26 52
---_._-- _._- - -- ---_.- .--- -.----- -- .---.---.-------.-.----- .---. -_ ...•. -- ----.------ .. ---- --"------.-.

~-=--.~=-.-=.==.-=-=-= ~·--=-~..:..~--=:APi~1_6
=. ==="""-=-~.::~-'=-,=-==--""=- -P~R¥~=-::~-~~~-:-~-~~~~:----:~-,_'--
Daily Exam 4A - Closed Book

Note: Tick only one alternative which you think is most appropriate.

1. Which document gives the methodology for RBI?

a. API 579
b. API 570
c. API 580
d. API 574

2. "Pipe to soil potential survey" for poorly coated pipes (or where cathodic
protection is not reliable) should be contacted at intervals of:
a. Five years
b. Three years
c. Ten years
d. Six years

3. In pressure decay method for testing under ground pipe, the acceptance
criteria is that pressure decrease over a period of:
a. Eight hours shall not exceed 5%
b. Four hours shall not exceed 5%
c. Twenty four hours shall not exceed 10%
d. Twenty four hours shall not exceed 5%

4. In pressure-decay method for testing underground pipes, minimum leak test

pressure is % of maximum operating pressure.
a. 150%
b. 50%
c. 110%
d. 125%

5. Marker chemical (tracer) is used for testing the underground pipes for the purpose
of:
a. Checking internal smoothness of pipe
b. Checking strength and ductility of piping material
c. Checking the diameter of underground pipe
d. Detecting and locating the leaks in the pipe line

6. Except for the class 4500 valves, the valve wall thickness is times the
thickness of a simple cylinder designed for a stress of psi for similar
pressure and temperature.
a. 1.1 times and 7000 psi
b. 1.5 times and 15000 psi
c. 1.25 times and 15000 psi
d. 1.5 times and 7000 psi

7. The retirement thickness of valves and flanged fittings can be computed using
formula for pipes bv IJsinq:
a. Factor of 1.5 and the stress :..-:15000 psi
b. Factor of 1.25 and stress = 7000 psi
c. Factor of 1.5 and allowable stress as per ASMEB 31.3
d, Factor of 1.5 ,Jnrl stress:::: 7000 psi

8. remporary repairs nf locally tr:nllerj sections nr cirrllmf;:rential line;ir ,jpfAr:tS n'ay

be rr'clde on-str,:arn by instol!ir'(] d ;)r ~;>:;rly ,','sig'cdJ ,-!I,d f,")i<,-akd i)i1;;:' j I':'jf<
ciarnp. What would lhis acti'/ity be ;errned as?
;. \/Ve!c!! .J ~-l?r·\n;r ((\1; ·:;ti ~:(1I;:)

Closed Book -4A P.S, Joshi Page 1 of 3

· ---_._- ----- -. -. - ..- - - -.-.- - -- - - -- -. - _.-
.. - ..--- --- -- --_. __ . - - - --.- .- "-- .- - - -._- --- -- - - .---- - --.---. - -- - -- .-- -- -- --

- _ . _._b_.: - = P~rDgl1~Qt=r~}lIr == ... :_.: .... :.~ = . =. = . _

-....,- ..'.-"--~-_
.. _..•_~.,-'-c; ·-·~{)11-Wel(lJ_n9 -repair l.-ofFS~1r¥_-.=· ==._.=.~
..e= .••,..,.=.. =.::-~_:.= =.=..=.=_==_=_
.. '"c.-h_:-~~~:.:-_--'-;:--=_~==.: =.=.. =_.
=.=. _=_=.
d. Hot tapping

9. Following inspection data is available for a piping circuit.

Minimum required thickness = 0.422 in
Actual thickness measured = 0.512 in
Long term corrosion rate = 0.018 in / year

Remaining life for this circuit will be

a. 5.0 years
b. 4.5 years
c. 6.0 years
d. Data is insufficient to calculate remaining life

10. Piping classifications (class 1, 2, 3) in API 570 will respectively mean:

a. Low, medium and high pressure pipes
b. High, medium, low pressure pipes
c. Low, medium, high level of inspection to be performed
d. High, medium, low level of inspection to be performed

11. Inspection records contain the following information for a particular thickness
measurement location (TML) in a return bend:

Thickness Year
0.500 0
0.425 5
0.400 10
On the basis of the information above, the long-term corrosion rate for the
location is:
a. 1 V2 mils per year
b. 5 mils per year
c. 10 mils per year
d. 100 mils per year

12. For thickness measurement of pipes NPSl and smaller. NDT technique employed
would be:
a. Ultrasonic technique
b. Radiographic profile technique
c. Anyone is OK
d. None are OK

13. If probable corrosion rates can not be determined on-stream determinations

shall be made approximately
a. 6 months of service
b. 3 months of service
c. 1 month of service
d. None of the above

14. Thickness monitoring during periodic measurements is tdken at:

d. :.Jame 11'vILS as used in previous inspection and appf oachin!]
retire: nent thickness
b. New TMLS only
c. F.ither same or new are okay
d. Depends on opinion of inspector

.IS. For cain.latinq ~Ij/\':\P of Piping Cicuit whicfl is pi t in 5evi("~ th.~ INc,J!
i:licklk:~S L,.)ic:d If'. cornp llat!ons j.,;
'-', /\ctual thicknpss ·,s (i{::t':'rm;'l'~d by inspe(+;'~;l.

Closed Book -4A

PS Joshi
Page 2 of 3
-------.-- ----~ - --- - -- - ----------_._-------------------"-- ------.-- ..-----.----- ..
- - - - - -- -. -b: - - Actual thickiiess- rninus the-estimated--cbrrosionloss before the
:::::-::::;:;::::-;;:-:-:~"-::~-:~7~~~~ne;(T~I-I;;,p~L.~J;,;:-~:-:::----:-:-: --:==-- :- _-- - - . - ::_.:~ ::-

c. Actual thickness minus twice the estimated corrosion loss

before the date of next inspection
d. None of the above

16. Table 6-2 of API 570 standard gives extent of CUI inspection following the visual
inspection, which is applicable to:
a. Entire insulated area
b. Areas with damaged insulation
c. Suspect areas within susceptible temperature
d. band c

17. As per API 570 for bolted flanged joints, bolts and nuts are considered as
acceptably engaged if the lack of complete engagement is:
a. Not more than two threads
b. Not more than one thread
c. Bolts and nuts are engaged at least 50% of threads in the nuts
d. Bolts shall completely extend through nuts

18. When an RBI assessment is used to increase or decrease inspection intervals,

the assessment shall be conducted on Class 1 systems at a maximum interval
of years
a) 5
b) 10
c) 15
d) 3

19. Class 3 piping is described as being in services

a) with the highest potential of resulting in an immediate emergency if a leak
occurs
b) that are flammable but do not significantly vaporise when they leak and are
not located in high-activity areas
c) that are flammable and slowly vaporize if leak occurs
d) that are not in classes 1 and 2.

20. Thickness measurement inspection on Class 1 piping should be scheduled based

on the calculation of not more than
a) one half the remaining life determined from corrosion rates or the
maximum interval of 5 years whichever is shorter.
b) one half the remaining life determined from corrosion rates or 5 years,
whichever is longer
c) one fourth the remaining life determined from corrosion rates or the
maximum interval of 10 years whichever is shorter
d) one quarter the remaining life determined from corrosion rates or 5 years,
whichever is longer

Closed Book -4A

P.S_ Joshi
Page 3 of 3
·---. ~"_ .. _- --- ----.-~ - - - - --.- - -- _. - - - • u ._ .. ._. ._. . ._. . • ~_. _. _

--.--- -- --- .. --- ------- --- -----

-....~.=.~.._-.-~-"'.....---.-
;...-_-
. .
...,_-.-.,_-:.-_-n-. -. .=-.-', --::;-:.,.-;.-._
--~-~-
... -. - ~- - - . --
-------
_ .. -.-
- -
--- ---
n __ ".
_.
__ .•

API 570 PREPARATORY COURSE

Exam 4A - Closed Book
ANSWER KEY

Q. NO. ANSWER Q. NO. ANSWER

1 C 27
2 A 28
3 B 29
4 C 30
5 D 31
6 D 32
7 C 33
8 C 34
9 A 35
10 D 36
11 C 37
12 B 38
13 B 39
14 A 40
15 C 41
16 D 42
17 B 43
18 A 44
19 B 45
20 A 46
21 ---------------------------- 47
22 48
23 49
24 50
25 51
26 52

P:JC 1 0r 1
--- - -- ---- .. ---- .. ----- _. --- - ---- - ---.-.- -- ---------------- ..--.----- ------- -.---------- - ------------ ---.----- ... -- .. -
- - _. - - - - - +- - - - - - - - - •• - - - - - - - - - - - • - - .- - - - - - - - - •

------------.---------0_---- .. . . _
- -- ---.-
- -
----.--,.- ---.--- u __ -----

-- ---- ---------:.- - -APF570 pR£PAkA IU~· --- ----- ---.-- ..

--
Daily Exam SA - Closed Book

Note: Tick only one alternative which you think is most appropriate.

1. A welder has made 25 SMAW groove welds, but the guided bend test for the
welder's qualification was never performed. In order to avoid cutting out all of
the production welds made by this welder, which of the following minimum steps
would be taken to validate the qualification?
a. Radiograph the welder's first production weld and accept the qualification
based on acceptable weld quality by radiography.
b. There is no alternative to qualifying a welder by the guided bend test.
c. Have the welder prepare a test coupon and have the bend test done on
that
d. Radiograph all 25 welds, regardless of the governing specifications for
sample selection

2. Which of the following represent grouping of weld-metals in ASME IX?

a. P - Nos
b. F - Nos
c. S - Nos
d. A - Nos

3. Welders carrying out repair/alteration according to API 570 shall be qualified

according to
a. API 1104 welding qualification code
b. ASMESec. IX code
c. Anyone of a or b above
d. None of a or b above

4. A PQR was qualified in 5G position using a new welder. But production welding
is to be done in 2G position. Which of the folloWing are applicable as a
minimum?
a. Both procedure and welder shall be re-qualified in 2G position.
b. The qualified procedure can be used ,only welder needs to be re-qualified
c. The welder is qualified, but the procedure needs re-qualification
d. Both procedure and welder need not be re-qualified.

5. For API 5L gr B (SMTS=60000 psi) material, following results were obtained for
two tensile test specimens in PQRqualification.
Specimen Tl: failed in S.M. at 57,400 psi
Specimen T2: failed in weld metal, at 59,500 psi

Your assessment is:

a. PQRtest is ok since both are within acceptance criteria

b. PQRtest is rejected as both Tl and T2 are not within acceptance criteria
c. PQRin rejected beG1USe Tl is ok but T2 has failed
a. i-'Qi-Z in rejected beculls'~ 11 is lellied though rz is ok

6. Minimum thickness evaludtion may be conducted by?

a. Use of un external micrometer only
b. Ultrasonic testing
c. D.P. check
b. r:one ;)f 1bo\/e

Closed BQQk -SA

P.S. Joshi
Page 1 of 3
- ~ 0 0 ~ ._. • _

- - - - -- - - -- - - -- -- - - - - - - - -- - .--- - -
- - - _. - - -
- - - - - - - - --- - -- -- - -- - - - -- - - - - - - -- - - -~ .- -
- -- --_.~ -- .--- - - -- -- - -- - - -- - - - -- - - --- ----- - . - - -- - - --- -- - - -.- - - - -- -- --.- - _. -.--- -- _ .. _.
----

;=-:C--.:-::-:-~~~;;-~d' .'- ~S gIves"tne' procedure"test'data:ancrresults-:-orfen"Site!b~est~~ ~~":'~~u';:~-:-"'" .~~_~u,

b. PQRgives ranges qualified by procedure test

c. PQRgives procedure test data and WPSgives ranges qualified
d. WPS and PQRboth give test data and ranges qualified

8. If a welder is to be qualified in all positions he must pass test in which

positions?
a. IG, 2G, and 6G
b. 5G and 4G
c. 6G
d. 6G and 4G

9. According to ASME Sec. IX, Supplementary Essential Variables are to be recorded if

impact testing is specified. Otherwise,
a. They shall be considered as non-essential.
b. They shall be considered as essential.
c. Depends on opinion of welding engineer
d. Depends on opinion of API 570 inspector

10. Procedure Qualification is done by:

a. 1 tensile and 2 bend tests
b. 1 tensile and 1 radiography
c. 1 bend test and 1 radiography
d. 2 tensile and 4 bend tests

11. Identify correct statement from following:

a. Tensile test for procedure qualification is passed only if base metal failure
occurs at or above Specified Minimum Tensile Strength (SMTS) of base metal
b. Tensile test for procedure qualification is passed only if base metal failure
occurs above SMTS of base metal
c. Tensile test for procedure qualification is passed even if weld metal failure
occurs above 95% of SMTS of base metal
d. None of above

12. What type of defect should not be repaired by a full encirclement welded split
sleeve?
a) A longitudinal crack
b) A circumferential crack
c) Pits that are one half through wall
d) General corrosion

'vay be nlld ? n

a) Once a month
b) Approximately 6 month intervals
c) Once a year
d) Onl~e G':ery 3 months

1,'1. :J,'i-"ilil"i"C! ;;;f~ ,;f ripe circd:5 :L~lErmiiH~,1 by:

:1. Finding cut total leliqlh uf pipinq circuit

Closed Book - 0'\

P.s. Joshi Page 2 of 3
---- --------,-- - .---- - ------.-- --~---._-- - -.-- .._. --- ----.- ..- -.--- - -- -.- ----.- -,._- _ -
.. - - - --- _. -- - -.. - - ._-

•• u •• __ . ~ .. _. __ . • ~_ •. __ . . .• • • __ •• _ •• • .. _. ._ ._. • _ ._

-=-:-:~-~O<'.~~ -'1l~'-~- .:-rln-dl ng'"'Uut'-actual-tn JCKneSS t-req-U1'reCftnlcKneSS~na-=--'-=--~''''''=~-

-~_-_-
__-__
--"-,_--.-
~-,.,_.-.,_.--:----
__
-__
~.'---~--::;=_.==_,.=.~::_==_-=, _';'-=,--,--.C·~----

corrosion rate
c. Finding out original thickness and corrosion rate
d. Finding out the elapsed life of the pipe

15. When using radiographs to qualify welder, the acceptance standards

used are found in:
a. ASME Section V
b. ASME Section IX
c. ASME Section VII
d. The referencing code

16. What is the number of guided bend tests required for Performance
Qualification?
a. 2
b. 4
c. 6
d. 3

17. A welder qualified to weld in the 2G position on pipe would have to be qualified
in which of the additional positions to qualify for all position groove welding on
pipe?
a. 1G
b. 2G
c. 5G
d. 6G

18. An RBI assessment can be used to alter the inspection strategy provided:
a) Likelihood of failure and consequence of failure are evaluated.
b) The RBI is fully documented.
c) A third party conducts the RBI.
d) Both A and B above

19. What are the methods for detecting thickness of buried piping?
a) Eddy current testing, and / or possibly hammer testing
b) Intelligent pigging
c) Visual testing, eddy current testing
d) Acoustic emission testing, hydro-testing

20. You are reviewing a WPQ for a welder. The test results indicate the following:
• Satisfactory side bend
• Face bend satisfactory
• Visual satisfactory

Will these tests qualify the welder?

a. Yes
b. No, because bend tests are not correct type.

d. No, because r:-ldiogr;Jphy is pS5enti,-dfor welder qualification

Closed Boole' SA
P.S. Joshi P8ge 3 Of 3
- ._. __ •• _. _._. <_. _'U"_' • __ • . ._ , __ "_, ,_ . __ . • _ .. .• __ . .. . • . _

~~~~=~==~~~~~-
- . -- - -- ~- ;=-
__
- -~--~-- -- -
;=_~=;,=o======;~~~'==;=_. _=-"""
__
==..""'"_
;=
__ ==
__
;=-.
-- .-- .. --
_0======__ ==.
__=
.._..~
- .. - - .- - - ..._. -- -
..~_~ .__
~~_~~. ~ >~ _- _

API 570 PREPARATORY COURSE

Exam SA - Closed Book
ANSWER KEY

Q. NO. ANSWER Q. NO. ANSWER

1 A 27
2 0 28
3 B 29
4 B 30
5 C 31
6 B 32
7 C 33
8 C 34
9 A 35
10 0 36
11 0 37
12 A 38
13 B 39
14 B 40
15 B 41
16 A 42
17 C 43
18 0 . 44
19 B 45
20 B 46
21 ---------------------------- 47
22 48
23 49
24 50
25 51
26 52

;'.5. Jo~hi Page lofl

- --~ --- - - -- - - - -- - -~---.- -- -- - - - --- -- ---------- - -------------. --- - -- ----- - ---
- - - - - -' - -- - - - - - --. - - - - - - _. - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - . - - - - .' - .
------ -- -- - .---- .- - - _ .... -- .-- --
--
.. --'--- ----.----------
.- - ... - ..- -- -~-~-:..~b~-o-!1l#Jri9::l!1sp~1i.i3@W-E5!I'fp1_.r;x-arn-:;.fJPf~?4?~ :~~-=-..:
__~~==_=_~:
. =-=~~=_:_:.___
ANSWER SHEET
Name Date
Organization Time

Notes 1. Choose only one answer for each question.

2. Mark most appropriate answer like this:

A B C D
0 0 0 0 (mark by pencil only)

SN A B C 0 SN A B C 0 SN A B C 0
1. 0 0 0 0 31. 0 0 0 0 61. 0 0 0 0
2. 0 0 0 0 32. 0 0 0 0 62. 0 0 0 0
3. 0 0 0 0 33. 0 0 0 0 63. 0 0 0 0
4. 0 0 0 0 34. 0 0 0 0 64. 0 0 0 0
5. 0 0 0 0 35. 0 0 0 0 65. 0 0 0 0
6. 0 0 0 0 36. 0 0 0 0 66. 0 0 0 0
7. 0 0 0 0 37. 0 0 0 0 67. 0 0 0 0
8. 0 0 0 0 38. 0 0 0 0 68. 0 0 0 0
9. 0 0 0 0 39. 0 0 0 0 69. 0 0 0 0
10. 0 0 0 0 40. 0 0 0 0 70. 0 0 0 0
11. 0 0 0 0 41. 0 0 0 0 71. 0 0 0 0
12. 0 0 0 0 42. 0 0 0 0 72. 0 0 0 0
13. 0 0 0 0 43. 0 0 0 0 73. 0 0 0 0
14. 0 0 0 0 44. 0 0 0 0 74. 0 0 0 0
15. 0 0 0 0 45. 0 0 0 0 75. 0 0 0 0
16. 0 0 0 0 46. 0 0 0 0 76. 0 0 0 0
17. 0 0 0 0 47. 0 0 0 0 77. 0 0 0 0
18. 0 0 0 0 48. 0 0 0 0 78. 0 0 0 0
19. 0 0 0 0 49. 0 0 0 0 79. 0 0 0 0
20. 0 0 0 0 50. 0 0 0 0 80. 0 0 0 0
21. 0 0 0 0 51. 0 0 0 0 81. 0 0 0 0
22. 0 0 0 0 52. 0 0 0 0 82. 0 0 0 0
23. 0 0 0 0 53. 0 0 0 0 83. 0 0 0 0
24. 0 0 0 0 54. 0 0 0 0 84. 0 0 0 0
25. 0 0 0 0 55. 0 0 0 0 85. 0 0 0 0
26. 0 0 0 0 56. 0 0 0 0 86. 0 0 0 0
27. 0 0 0 0 57. 0 0 0 0 87. 0 0 0 0
28. 0 0 0 0 58. 0 0 () 0 RR, n 1 IJ '1
29. 0 0 0 0 <;9. 0 0 0 0 89. 0 0 0 {'
30. 0 0 0 0 60. 0 0 0 0 90. 0 0 0 0
Total 1\1,OJI"ks
_._-~-_.- - ------ -------.--
- .. ~--------._-- ---.-.-
---- -------- -- ... .. ~~-----_ _--~--_._-_._-,-_.. _--_._-- ..
... ----. --'-.---- ---------.------
•.. ... - -.- ..-- .. ---- ----

Exam!ner's Signa: IJre:

~~-_. - _. ".--- [;,.Jtt-' :

Answer sheet
PS. Joshi Page 1 of 1
- .---.- -_.,--- --_ .. _~---_.- ..~--
==:===========================-:='j{A''PF57()::PREPAmITO'-K'"''J=-=~=~===~-=-=_._=-=--=_._-=========~=- ~----
Final Exam - Open Book

Instructions:
Tick only one alternative, which you think is most appropriate.
You may refer to the applicable ASME/API documents.

1. The following data is presented for a class 2 pipe,

Thickness = 0.36 inch (after inspection)
Corrosion rate = 10 mpy
Remaining life = 16 years
When is the next thickness measurement inspection due?

a. After 8 years
b. After 5 years
c. After 10 years
d. None of the above

2. Please calculate remaining corrosion allowance for piping in Question 1 above.

a. 0.20 inch
b. 0.28 inch
c. 0.12 inch
d. 0.16 inch

3. When will be the next inspection schedule from now on for external inspection
for pipe in Q.1?
a. 10 years
b. 8 years
c. 5 years
d. none of the above

4. The pipe in Q.1 above has an insulated area of 200 sq. ft., which is exposed to
susceptible temperature and mist spray of cooling tower. According to API 570,
how much of minimum area is recommended for. NDT surVey for CUI during
external inspection?
a. 100 square feet
b. 50 square feet
c. 66 square feet
d. 150 square feet

5. A PQR is to be qualified using 5/8 inch thick test coupon. It can

qualify thickness:
a. 1/8" to 1-1/4"
b. 1/16" to 5/8"
c. 1/16" to 1-1/4"
d. None of the above

is The rpO)rYHTlendprj minirnum devploprywnt Ume (P::;netrilnt restinq) al!owed for

a material maue of high temperature alloy is:
a. 5 min
b. 10 min
c. 7 rnin
d. 6 rnin

7. /\:'<:lioqraph 'N,S havinCJ rJpnsity ':2::11- the ;::;Fc:;etri::r!'tcl'ijlidi t:o 3.0. 'k"r:: Ul:;
acceptdblf; cl.:rlsity range of the radiograph is:
,L 1,.7 t() (-~

API S70 Open bOOK final exam P.S. Joshi Page 1 of 4

None of the above

8. For piping buried in soil with resistivity of 5000-ohm cm and not cathodically
protected, evaluations of pipe thickness should be performed at:
a. 10 year interval
b. 5 year interval
c. 3 year interval
d. None of the above

9. For a certain Natural gas piping s~stem, which is in operation for 16 years, it is
estimated that it has remaining life of 12 years. Considering the stipulation of
API 570, which of the following will determine maximum interval for next
proposed date for thickness measurement examination and visual examination?
a. 6 years and 5 years respectively
b. 3 years and 10 years respectively
c. 10 years and 5 years respectively
d. 6 years and 6 years respectively

) 10. An Inspector finds incomplete penetration of 2mm in a radiograph of a girth

weld of normal fluid service piping 12 mm thick. Can he accept as per ASME
831.3?
a. If the incomplete penetration is greater than 1 mm, reject.
b. If the incomplete penetration is more than 1 mm but still less
than 0.2 times pipe thickness, accept.
c. Depends on opinion of inspector
d. Radiograph again and then decide on acceptance.

11. You are planning for the Hydro-test of a piping with Hydro test pressure
2
40Kg/cm g. The calibrated test gauges available with you are 0-50 Kg/cm2g, 0-
2
100 Kg/cm g, 1-150 Kg/cm2g and 0-200 Kg/cm2g. Which two gauges are
acceptable for this test?
a. 0-100 Kg/cm2g and 0-150 Kgjcm2g
b. 0-50 Kg/cm2g and 0-100 Kg/cm2g
c. 0-100 Kg/cm2g and 0-200 Kgjcm2g
d. 0-50 Kg/cm2g and 0-200 Kgjcm2g

12. What would you expect to happen if you were taking UT readings on piping that
was operated higher than 200 degrees F?
a. The thickness readings could be lower.
b. The thickness readings would not be influenced.
c. The thickness readings could be about 1% higher for each 100 degrees F
rise of temperature.
d. The thickness readings may be h.igher or lower depending on couplant.

13. A welded part is to be radiographed and is 1" thick, with 1/8" reinforcement.
What ASTM wire set IQI should be used on these radiographs if a source side
technique is used?
~" ~~c~./\
b. Set B
c. Set C
d. Set D

14. The document referenCf?din /\Pi l)lO for determining "fitness for si,:rvice ff 01'
r;pjl1~j sysrern ,,'
1. l'\PT '5/9
b. API .574
/\:~~J'i;f: l3 ~~_L. 1

API 570 Open book final exam . PS Joshi Page 2 of 4

.------------ - - ---
-----------===- ====='~-=======================o:=~=

API 570 PREPARATORY

Final Exam - Open Book
Answer Key

1. A
2. D
3. C
4. C
5. D
6. b
7. B
8. A
9. C•...p..,
10. A
11. .e- A:
12. C
13. B
14. A
15. C
16. B
17. A
18. A
19. C
20. B
21. D
22. D
23. D
24. B
25. C

_ ;-·0
P.S. Joshi
PaCie 1 of I
.- - - - - - - - - - - - - --- -- - ~ • - n. • ~ , _. _

---------.------ -
- --- --- --.- ..--."----
.
.'-- ---'. -_. -- .. - -_. - ---
- . -~ .... _--. -~ -- -.~ ... - --'-.-. - .... -. - - -- .-- .... --

API 570 PREPARATORY

Final Exam - Open Book
(SOLUTION)

Q.1 Remaining life = 16 years

Thickness measurement interval = V2 remaining life or 10 years -use lower

(Ref.: API 570:6.3 and Table 6-1)

Answer: a (Ref.: 7.1.1 of API 570)

Q.2 Remaining c.A. = Remaining life x Corrosion rate

= 16 x 10
= 160 mils say 0.16"

Answer: d (Ref: 7.1.1 of API 570)

Q.3 Answer: C (Ref.: Table 6-1)

Q.4 Answer: C (Ref.: Table 6-2)

Q.5 Answer: d (Ref.: ASME Sec. IX, Table 451.1)

Qualified thickness is 3/16" to 1 V4"

Q.6 Table in Art. 6 of ASME Sec. V show development time ofl0 minutes for all
materials.

Answer: C

Q.7 ASME Sec. V, Art. 2. Density variation in -15% to +30%

Answer: b

Q.8 Ref.: Table 9-1 of API 570

Answer: a

Q.9 Natural gas is Class 2 fluid (Ref.: 6.2.2 of API 570)

Refer Table 6-1 of API 570

Answer: C

Q.10 Refer Table 341.3.2, pages 77 and 78 from ASME B31.3

Incomplete penetration permitted is 1mm for letter "B" for normal fluid, girth
weld.

Answer: a

Q. tl I-<.efer ASME See. V (Le,"lk Testing .- :\rt, 10). The riJil::]e fJr pressure
gauges is:

o to 1 V2 times (mini: ilurn Idnge)

() to 4 times
(maximumange)

for oiven:xample,

APr ~70 Open I'look-l Solution

P S. Joshi
Page 1 of 3
u_ • .•. _
- - - - -- - - - - -- - - - .- - - - .. - - -
_. - .-
-.---- ----

Answer: d

Q.12 Refer SE-797 from Section V.

Refer paragraph no. 8.

Answer: c

Q.13 Refer Art. 2, ASME Sec. V.

IQI is on source side.

We need wire no. 9 for thickness=l"
Wire no. 9 will be in Set B.

Answer: b

Q.14 Ref. Section 2 of API 570 Page 2-1

Answer: a

Q.15 For deoxidized steel (Al06 grB, T.S = 60,000 psi)

Average required = 13 ft Ib, min 10 ft Ib for one.
For non-deoxidised steel (A53 grB, T.S = 60,000 psi)
Average required 10 ftjlb and min for one = 7 ft Ib

12.5 + 13.5 + 12
Average for Al06 grB == ------ = 12.5 < 13
3

11+11.5+9
Average for A53 grB = ---- = 10.5 > 10 ft Ib
3

Minimum for one == 9 > 7 ft Ib

Answer: c (Ref.: ASME B31.3, page 54)

Q.16 A 106 grC pipe belongs to P No. 1 material. So it will qualify only P No. 1
materials. A lOS, A 516 gr60 and A516 gr70 are P No.1 materials.

Refer Table QW-422 from ASME Sec. IX.

Answer: b

Q.17 Refer API RP 578, paragraph 5.2.1

Answer: a

0,1;Q Rpfp( d\\I",:I j-irr'~ t"Ji;lp in Art 51 p.c:;~~r::S'~C. '/.

S(~e the note below the tdble.

Answer: a

Q.19 Refc,r AS fvlL: 831. 3, Pdge 86, 345.5

Al'l 570 Open Book-l Solution

PS. Joshi
Page 2 of 3
- -- - -- - -- .- - -- - - - - - - ~- - - -- - - - - - _. - -~--- -- - ------.--.----------
- .." - .- -.-. - - -".- -. --- "'---- -"- .- _ •• n _. __ • __

--------------
Refer Table for selection of IQI
Required IQI is No. 25.

Answer: b

Q.21 Refer ASME Sec. V, Art. 2.

Required wire is no. 9.

Answer: d

Q.22 Refer dwell time in Art. 6 of ASME Sec. V.

Answer: d

Q.23 Refer Art. 6, ASME Sec. V - Interpretation

Interpretation shall be betweeriO mins to 60 mins

Answer: d

Q.24 Refer ASME Sec. IX - Table for F Nos.

E7018 and E7018 are both F No. = 4
So same PQR is OK. Only revise WPS.

Answer: b

Q.25 Refer API 570 Page 7-2 for MAWP thickness used shall be Actual Thickness minus
twice the corrosion loss up to next inspection.

0.4 - 2 x 0.01 x 6 = 0.28 inch

Answer: c

API 570 Open Book-l Solution

P.S. Joshi
Page30f3
-- - - .- - - - - - - - .- -- - - - -- - - - -. - - -.- - - -
_. - ... -"-- •.. -.- -------.---.- .. ------~. __ .~ -----~.- - .. ---- -
•..

======-'====;=================:==":"'===''=='=======:-=-
API 570 PREPARATORY COURSE
Exam 1 - Open Book

Note Tick only one alternative, which you think is most appropriate.

1. PWHTis required for all thicknesses of piping over V2 inch for which
of the following materials?
a. P Nos. 1 and 2
b. P Nos. 1 and 3
c. P Nos. 2 and 3
d. P Nos. 4 and 5

2. NPS 12, Sch 80 and Sch 160 pipes (M.O.C = A 106 gr B) are to be used at -100 C.
Determine whether,
a. Both pipes require impact testing
b. Only Sch 160 will require impact test but Sch 80 would be exempt.
c. Both would be exempt
d. Sch 80 would require but Sch 160 will be exempt.

3. A 6" NB Sch 40 pipe is selected for following conditions.

Design Pr = 360 psi
Design Temp. = 300 degrees F
M.O.C. = A 53 gr B (ERW)
Corrosion Allowance = 2.0 mm
Assume standard mill tolerance

Your assessment is:

a. Pipe design meets code requirement

b. Pipe design does not meet code requirement
c. Depends on opinion of Piping Inspector
d. Depends on opinion of Piping Design Engineer

4. A piping installation was constructed out of material requIring impact testing.

Followingtwo steel materials (material A and B) were tested for impact test results.
These materials are to be used for repair work on piping. The test data is as follows:

Material A:
Material B:
SMTS = 65000 psi (Deoxidized)
SMTS = 60,000 psi (Deoxidized)
Reading for specimen (1) = 16.0 ft Ib
Reading for specimen (1) = 15.0 ft Ib
Reading for specimen (2) = 17.5 ft Ib
Reading for specimen (2) = 14.0 ft Ib
Reading for specimen (3) = 9.5 ft Ib
Reading for specimen (3) = 10.0 ft Ib

a.
b.
Both material (A) and (B) are OK
(A) is OK but (6) is not OK
c.
(B) is OK but (A) is not OK
d.
12 ryf-h '-I -,.") nnr {".'/
_!. '-':' . .-I'~ . - • "

?;f5. A austentic stainless steel piping system operates between temperatures of -.50
OF and 350 OF .The temperature of installation was 100 OF. The approximate values
of Illinirnurn ,~xpansion and contraction range for sliding support installed at 150 ft
from the anchored end will :'especti'v ~ly be:
a. 7.4 i:1ch '1ndL3 inch
b ~'l.J ;':ch dqd ),/L inch
c. L.g inch dnd 4.8 inch
.i i,J{ .~ l-,F r~-:(:~ \.~ "/(~;

Open Book·l
P,S. Joshi
Doge 1 of 2
- .- -- - - -- - -- - - - -- - - - -- .... -- -- .- .- - - - -- - - - -- - -- - - -- -- - - - -- -.- - .. - -- -- - -- - ---
•...- --.. ---'-.-.----- ---- -.
•• -.-

---.-------- .-
-. -. -. - - •• - .-~.-

.-------. -
.- -- .-. -- - -.-- - - ----- •.. __ • _. - 0- _~ ._ •• •• •
•• _. H •

-- - - - -- -
-"------'---'-----'"-'-. ~-----_.-
6. A Flat plate (without joints) is used as permanent blank for flanged
point with gasket 1.0 = 200 mm Design pro = 200 psi. and safe stress
value for plate is 18,000 psi, for given temperature of 250°C. what shall
be the minimum blank thickness ~ given options. Corrosion
allowance is Nil code of constr B 31.3~mm(zu

]a .• 10 mm

tr. , 12 mm

d( '. 14 mm
7. A 106 gr B pipe after installation, required Hydrostatic leak test. Following data is
presented Design pr = 300 psi, Design temp = 5000F. Considering stress at
design as well as ambient temperature determine correct hydrotest pro If test is
carried out at ambient conditions.450 psi
qj
476 psi

330 psi

375 psi

8. Calculate pneumatic test pressure for above piping considering stress

correction.

a. 349 psi

b. 396 psi

c. 408 psi

d. 330 psi

9. Maximum Brinell hardness observed (after PWHT)on following three

points was as follows:
Joint 1: MOC = PN04, thk = 16mm, Hardness = 240 HB
Joint 2: MOC = PNOS,thk = 16mm, Hardness = 238 HB
Joint 3: MOC = PN03, thk = 20 mm, Hardness = 228 HB

Your assessment is:

a. All joints are okay as per ASMEB 31.3

b. Joint 2, and 3 are okay, joint 1 not okay
c. Only jOint 1 is okay. Joint 2, and 3 are not.
d. None of the above are correct answers.

10. Identify incorrect statementjs:

, In impact test exemption curves, curve D represents better
toughness material than cu, ve .3
&. curve C represents rnore britUe matpr al than Curve B
~ ::"ully r:!c>o;,idi7ed c;L,c's ,:ri~ touLd;cc, : !'n iOIl<.Loxidizcd
1),]I:erl,]JS
~. d and c

Open Book-l
PS. Joshi
Page 2 of 2
- -- - - - ~. - - - _. - - -

~:_:~~_~.~= _== = _-_: ~== ~.'.'.:.= = ~ - - - - - - -

---.:.:~.AY1-..s-l((~g~PAMl:1.>.~Y
-"Exam-J: ---upen HOOK
Solution

Q.l Ref: B 31. 3, Table 331.1.1, Page 69

Correct answer: d

Q.2 12" Sch 80 pipe, thk 17.45 mm =

12" Sch 160 pipe, thk = 33.32 mm
A 106 Gr B is "Curve B" material.

Ref. Fig. 323.2.2A,

Combination of - 10°c and 17.45 mm is above curve B

(Refer Table 323.2.2A for correct reading)

Combination of - 10°c and 33.32 is below curve B

12" Sch 80 No impact test
12" Sch 160 Require impact test

Correct answer: b

PD
Q.3 tm = ----+C s = 20000 psi, E = 0.85
2(SE + Py)
D= 168.28 mm, Y=O.4

= 360 x 168.28 +2
2(20000 x 0.85 + 360 x 0.4)

= 1.77+2
= 3.77

tOrd = 3.77 = 4.30 mm.

0.875

)
Thk of 6 "Sch 40 = 7.11 ... safe
/

Correct answer: a

Q.4 Material A

Average of 3 16 + 17.5 + 9.5 = 14.33 =Ok.

3
Value of 1 is 9.5'ft Ib < 10 ft Ib - not Ok.

Material B
!" ~ 1~· :- ~0
Av[~rage of 3 :--:----- = 13.0 ----Ok.
3
Value of 1 is 10 ft Ib--Ok.

Q, 5:Li. FvpC11~;jl)11 For JSO"P} .: i~yp, up to 35()"F - [0,'), ph)' "~cpr:

=-: 3.2- 0.34 = 2.86

Open 800k ~l*ltl--\''7:r key-l

P.S, Joshi
P~ge 1 of 2
- - - - - _ - - - _. -
.. . - ..- - - -- - - - - - ---- - _. - -- -. - -. - .-- - -- - - - -.- -- - - .-.. - -- - - - - - - -- - -..

>~~~-:~~-:'~-c~Nett=eX~Z;-nif~~tor2~·B~~~xp~.:up
to:-:::-;-iJ~~{~xil1p-to--Ifmot-)-.~
-- ----.----
= -
1.24 - 0.34
=-1.58. Negative sign means it is actually
contraction

For 150 feet, Total Contraction = 1.5x1.58 = 2.37" ~ 2.4"

Correct answer: b

3 x 200
= +0
16 x 18,000 x 1

= 9.12 mm say 10 mm

Correct answer: b

Stress at test temp

Q.7 Pt = 1.5 x P x --------_
Stress at design temp

= 1.5 x 300 x 20000 = 476.19 si

18900 p

Correct answer: b

Q.8 Pneumatic pro = 1.1 x 300 x 20000 = 349.2 psi

189000
Correct answer: a

Q.9 P No.4 Hardness required 225 HB max.

P No.5 Hardness required 241 HB max.
P No.3 Hardness required 225 HB max.

Correct answer: d

Q.l0 Correct answer: b (incorrect answer)

Actually, B is tougher than A
C is tougher than A and B
D is tougher than A, Band C

Open Soak a""'-er keY-l

P.S. Joshi
Pdge 2 of 2
-- - - - - - - - -- - - - - - - - - - - _. - - - -- - - . -- - - - - - _. - - - -- _.- - - - - _. - -- -- - -
-- -'---"- -'- - --_ -'-'_-0-

API 570 PREPARATORY COURSE

Exam 1 - Open Book
ANSWER KEY

O.NO. ANSWER O.NO. ANSWER

1 0 27
2 B 28
3 A 29
4 C 30
5 B 31
6 B 32
7 B 33
8 A 34
9 0 35
10 B 36
11 -------------------------- 37
12 38
13 39
14 40
15 41
16 42
17 I 43
18 44
19 45
20 46
21 47
22 48
23 49
24 50
25 51
26 52

Open Soak i);;"NU ':eY-l I

1'.$, Joshi j)aQp. 1 of 1
- - - - - -- - ~ - - - -. - - - -. - - -- - - .- - -_ - _. ... - - - - - ..• -- - - - - - - - - - --- - - -- .-- - - - - -. - - - - --
._. - -.. - -- -- --.-- _. -~.. • ._. - __ --0- _•._.~
.. _ .._. . ._ ." •__ ~.. _.__
---
--.--.---"--.-.-'--.-.---------'--------- --.-- --.----

API 570 PREPARATORY COURSE

Exam 2B - Open Book

Note: Tick only one alternative which you think is most appropriate.

1. An ASTM A53 Grade B pipe with a maximum wall thickness of 0.75" is being
considered for use in a cold service. What minimum temperature can it be used
and not have an impact test?
a. +20 degrees F
b. +15 degrees F
c. +10 degrees F
d. 0 degrees F

2. Which of the following fluid services or classes of piping are excluded from the
specific requirements of API 570?
a. Hazardous fluid services below threshold limits defined by
jurisdictional requirements
b. Piping or tubing with an outside diameter not exceeding
that of N PS 112"
c. Non-metallic piping and polymeric or glass-lined piping
d. All of the above

3. For welding a 6" NB sch 160 low alloy piping (1 114 % cr, 1/2% Mo) to (2-1/.4
Cr 1 Mo) during plant erection, which of the following are applicable. Assume
UTS value for both as 70000 psi
a. Preheat at 300 OFmin. and PWHT in range 1300 OF- 1375 OF
b. No preheating but PWHT in the range 1300 - 1400 OF
c. Preheating at 350 OFmin and PWHT in the range 1300 - 1375 OF
d. Preheating at 350 OFand no PWHT

4. PWHT was carried out on 280 welds on pipes of P No 3 material in 2 batches of

(A) 200 and (B) 80 respectively. Batch A was carried out in furnace and Batch B
by local heat treatment. From batch A, 28 samples and from Batch, 40 samples
were tested for Brinnel hardness. And brinnel hardness values were between
208 to 222 HB for batch A while for Batch B it was between 201 to 225 HB.

Your assessment is:

a. Batch A: sample size & hardness both not acceptable

Batch B: sample size & hardness both OK
b. Batch A: sample size & hardness both OK.
Batch B: sample size & hardness both OK
c. Batch A: sample size inadequate but hardness OK
Batch B: sample size adequate but hardness not acceptable

Gatch B: sample size iniJde'luate but hardness OK

5. ASTM A 105 flange (300 Ib rating) maximum system hydrostatic pressure shall
not exceed:
a. 600 psi
1,.1-50 psi
c. 110rJ';i
d. 1125 I_~i

API 570 open bcok-2B PS Joshi Page 1 of 2

- -~ . -~emp - 4Utl~r-Wlll De
~=
'-Qr.- PiQ~JI~6ge~-lA)'05rfo!JJ.esig:rlj)~(40C)=-psf:-~-:C1E:~rgri= ~~..= :.:
- . - - - -G. :::~j..l.l~QL~j:~ti.Dfl
_. __.
=:.: =
.

a. 600 lb min.

b. 300 Ib min

c. 400 Ib min

d. None of the above

7. A carbon steel ASTM A 53 Grade 8 material is being impact tested. What is the
minimum energy requirement for this material (average for 3 specimens-fUlly
deoxidized steel)?
a. 7 ft-lbs
b. 10 ft-Ibs
c. 13 ft-Ibs
d. 15 ft-lbs

8. Where the design temperature of the system is the same as the hydrostatic test
temperature, the hydrostatic test pressure shall not be less than: (Yield stress
during hydrotest is not governing factor.)
a. that calculated according to ASMESec. VIII Code
b. 1.1 times the design pressure
c. 1.25 times the operating pressure
d. 1.5 times the design pressure

9. What is the longitudinal weld joint factor, Ej, for API 5L ERW (Electric Resistance
Welded) pipe?
a. 1.00
b. 0.95
c. 0.85
d. 0.60

10.
'S" is defined as the stress value for material from Table A-l of ASME 831.3.
Pick the value of "S" when the material is ASTM A335 Grade P5 and the
temperature is 950 degrees F.
a. 11,400 psi
b. 10,600 psi
) c. 8,000 psi
d. 20,00 psi

API 570 Open book-28

P.$. Joshi
rage 2 of 2
-- - - - - - - ~ .- - _ -- -
.. -- - - --- -- - - - - - -.- - - - - ~-_. - - - - - - - - .- _.
..• - - -- -
- - -. - ---~. -----.- .-.--.-.-.- ._- - ._. - -
,- - -- - - -- - - - _.~- _.~. - - _.
_ ... - "--- .. ... - -.---.-
- - -

API 570 PREPARATORY COURSE

Exam 28 - Open Book
ANSWER KEY

Q. NO. ANSWER O~ NO. ANSWER

1 C? 27
2 0 28
3 C 29
4 0 30
5 0 31
6 B 32
7 C 33
8 0 34
9 C 35
10 C 36
11 ------------------------------ 37
12 38
13 39
14 40
15 ;J 41
16 42
17 43
18 44
19 45
20 46
21 47
22 48
23 49
24 50
25 51
26 52

D (" 1,."
I. , ••..•
:. ~r'l
- - - -- - - - - _. - "- - - - -- - - - _. .. -- _. - -- - - - -- _. - - - - -- - - - .- - - - - -
-- - - - -- - --
"

-- - - -
-. -- --- - _. -~. -- .... -. _ ... - ;. ..-.,,- _.- - - -- -- -- "-- --- -- .. _. -. -- -.- ---- - - .- - - ~_. - -
-
- --
-- .~ -

==== ~=:-~=-.-==--.~-
.._-
API 570 PREPARATORY
DAILY EXAM 38 - OPEN BOOK

1. The recommended downstream limit of circuit of an injection point is a minimum of:

a) second change in flow direction past the injection point, or 25 feet beyond the
first change in flow direction whichever is less
b) second change in flow direction past the injection point, or 25 feet beyond the
first change in flow direction whichever is greater
c) second change in flow direction past the injection point, or 25
inches beyond the first change in flow direction whichever is less
d) second change in flow direction past the injection point, or 25
inches beyond the first change in flow direction whichever is greater
2. For external inspections for potential corrosion under insulation (CUI) on Class 1
systems, the examination should include at least percent of all suspect
areas and percent of all areas of damaged insulation:
a) 50, 75
b) 50, 33
c) 75, 50
d) 25, 10

3. For Class 2 piping, the extent of CUI inspections on a system operating at

45°F will be:
a) 75 % of damaged areas, 50 % of suspect areas
b) 50 % of suspect areas, 33 % of damaged areas
c) 33 % damaged areas, 50 % of suspect areas
d) None of the above

4. In the Barlow formula for determining pipe thickness, the term'S"

stands for:
a. internal design gage pressure of the pipe in psi
b. pressure design strength for internal pressure, in inches
c. allowable unit stress at the design temperature, in psi
d. maximum strain at the average operating temperature, in psi

5. Determine the linear expansion (in/l00 ft) of a carbon steel pipe between 70
degrees F and 450 degrees F
a. 3.04" per 100 ft
b. 3.39" per 100 ft
c. 2.93" per 100 ft
d. 3.16" per 100 ft

6. A 20' long carbon steel pipe is heated uniformly to 450 degrees F. from 70 degrees
F. Determine its length after heating.
a. 20.052'
b. 20.263'
c. 20.210'
rl. 7().7SW

7. As per API SlOt in case of normal uniform corrosion, compared to other piping. The
thickness measurements on valves:
a. fVlustbe routinely taken at ,elme frequency while inspcctiiig{0tiler piping
cornponents as valve thickness is less than other pipir:g cmponents

Upen ~_;'i)Vi< --':'6

}, S. Jecili
PeJ'je 1 of 2
-----.-------- -----------------------~------- --------*---- --- ------ ---_. ------- -----

b. Must be routinely taken at twice the frequency as other piping components as

valves are very critical components and essential for reliable operation.
c. Are not routinely taken unless unusual corrosion pattern and thinning is observed
during servicing and repair.
d. Are routinely at twice the frequency of other components because valves are
more expensive items compared to rest of the piping and must be more
frequently checked.

8. The UT thickness measurements for pipes at elevated temperatures, the readings

generally are corrected using thickness correction tables, because the readings are
normally
a. Higher than actual thickness
b. Lower than actual thickness
c. Temperature has no effect on the UT readings
d. Whether readings will be higher or lower depends on the UT
examiner's skill

9.
Certain areas and types of piping systems are potentially more susceptible to corrosion
under insulation. Which of the items listed is not susceptible to CUI?
a) Areas exposed to mist over-spray from cooling water towers
b) Carbon steel piping systems that normally operate in-service above 250
degrees but are in intermittent service
c) Deadlegs and attachments that protrude from insulated piping
d) Carbon steel piping systems, operating between 250 degrees F and 600
degrees F

10. Environmental cracking of austenite stainless steels is caused many times by:
a) exposing areas to high-velocity and high-turbulence streams
b) excessive cyclic stresses that are often very low
c) exposure to chlorides from salt water, wash-up water, etc.
d) creep of the material by long time exposure to high temperature and stress

i-',S, jo~:~i
-- - --- - - - - - _. - - - - - - -- - - --- - --- - - -- ~ - '- -- -- -- - - -- - - - - - ---- - - - -- -
-- -. --" •• -,

~-
- .----- .-- •••• -- - - -- - -- -- -- - - -- .. - - -~ - - _, - '_'n ' ',, .. __ •••• -- _._~ ,_

-~ -._- -------

API 570 PREPARATORY COURSE

Exam 38 - Open Book
ANSWER KEY

Q. NO. ANSWER Q. NO. ANSWER

1 A 27
2 A 28
3 0 29
4 C 30
5 0 31
6 A 32
7 C 33
8 A 34
9 D 35
10 C 36
11 ------------- 37
12
38
13
39
14
40
15
41
16
42
17
43
18
44
.. 19
45
20
46
21
47
22
48
23
49
24
50
25
51
26
52

1'.5. Jt;:,iJi
· - ~- - _. - - - -- - --.,- - - '- - - - - -- - - - .- - - - - -. - - -- - -_ -- -- ~_ _.~
.. .. - - -- - - ._- -- - - - - - - - - .-- .- - - .- - -.- .-- - - - - -
_. --. ~- - ••. - _. ~- - .. - -- - ._ ••• - u_ ~ - - ~ . •. • __ . _~ ._ ~_n •. _ • ~~ • _

=========================

API 570 PREPARATORY

DAILY EXAM 4B - OPEN BOOK

1. An eight-inch diameter piping system is installed in December 1979. The installed

thickness is measured as 0.34". The minimum thickness of the pipe is 0.20". It is
inspected in Dec/83 and the thickness is found to be 0.32". An inspection Dec/87
reveals a loss of 0.01" from the 12/85 inspection was during Dec/89 the thickness
was found to be 0.29". The last inspection was during Dec/95 and the thickness was
found to be 0.26". What is the long-term corrosion rate of this system?
a) 0.005"/year
b) 0.0075"/year
c) 0.00375"jyear
d) 0.0025"jyear

2. Using the information in question above, calculate the short-term corrosion rate.
a) 0.005"/year
b) 0.0075"/year
c) 0.00375"jyear
d) 0.0025"/year

3. Using the short-term corrosion rate in questions above, determine the remaining life
of the system.
a) 18 years
b) 15 years
c) 12 years
d) None of the above

4. Preheating to not less than degrees F may be considered as an

alternative to post weld heat treatment for alterations or repairs of P-l, piping
initially post weld heat
treated as a code requirement (may not be used if the piping was post weld heat
treated due to environmental cracking prevention)
a) 150
b) 200
c) 300
d) 350

5. If an "intelligent pigging" system is used to inspect buried piping, what type of bends
are usually required in the piping system?
a) Five diameter bends
b) 90 degree pipe ells
c) Ten diameter bends
d) Three diameter bends

6. How often should poorly coated pipes with inconsistent cathodic

protection potentials have a pipe-to-soil potential survey made?
rl) Ye.lrly
b) Every 2 years
c) Every 5 years
d) Every 7 years

C,; Evck-4Q
P..). )()~hi
Page 1 of 2
-------- ----------------------------- ---- ------------------------
- --- - - -
___ 4 -- ._-~_._.
- --
-- --
- --
-.-----.-~--------
- - -- - -- -
--_.
.-- -
_no --.---
-- -------
.---.----------
- - - ----- ----- --------- - -
.••• - -"-- • .__ • __ ~_ •• •. __ •
-
_.'._
-- -
•••
-- - -
~ n
-
__ .
- -
_._ ..
--- --- -- -- --- - - -- -- -- -- - - - -
•••. •••• • __ • ..
-

0"
_. -. --
•
-- - -
- -- -- - --- --- - ----- --- - ----- ••• -- __ h •• • • _

7. Buried piping inspected periodically by excavation shall be inspected in lengths of

------ feet at one or more location judged to be most susceptible to
corrosion.
a) 2 to 4
b) 4 to 6
c) 6 to 8
d) 8 to 10

8. A buried piping system that is not cathodically protected has to have an inspection
interval set. The soil resistivity is checked and found to be 3400 ohm/cm. As the
inspector, what interval would you set?
a) 2.5 years
b) 7.5 years
c) 5 years
d) 10 years

9. If a piping system is made up of unknown materials and computations must be made

to determine the minimum thickness of the pipe, what can the inspector or the
piping engineer do to establish the minimum thickness?
a) The lowest grade material and joint efficiency in the applicable code may be
assumed for calculations.
b) Samples must be taken from the piping and testing for maximum tensile
stress and yield strength will determine the allowable stress to be used.
c) The piping made of the unknown material must be removed from service and
current piping of known material must be installed.
d) The piping of unknown material may be subjected to a hydrostatic stress tests
while having strain gages on it to determine its yield strength and thus
allowable stress.

10. If a repair area is localised (for example, pitting or pin-holes) and the specified
minimum yield strength (SMYS) of the pipe is not more than psi, a
temporary repair may be made by fillet welding a properly designed plate patch over
the pitted area ;-
a) 30,000 psi
b) 55,000 psi
c) 40,000 psi
d) 36,000 psi

P_S. JOliii
---------------- --------------------------------------
- - - --- -- - - -.-
--
- --- --- - - -.-- -- --'-
---~....:-_.:---=----=-~::..-~--
-- - - - - - - - _ .. -- - - - - ~ - - - - - - - - -- ----.-
- -'--- - - -
..-:-:.-....::_-:-_:-_-..:-~-=---=---=:::.=-:-::---- -.-:-:::.:..".;- ---- ;:.-----.:-
--- ---'- - - _.
-:.:---:"- -_._~,----.
_ ..

-
-.-

- -------:.::.~--~-.:.....-.=.-- - - ----
-
- ---_-:._--.....:-..:-=-----=---::. -~--
-:....:.--~--~:-
. - -

-=~~-,",-_ .. _-,--_., .• -. -'--~,,- .. _---"--'~._-'---'---'-- ---''-'- ~'~~-'--='---- '=-~---" --~- -"- ...,._..._~_._-- .. -~'.....
.:.-'----'-"_._'-
.."'--_._-~-_.-

API 570 PREPARATORY

Daily Exam 4B - Closed Book
ANSWER KEY
Q. NO. ANSWER Q. NO. ANSWER
1 A 27
2 A 28
3 C 29
4 C 30
5 A 31
6 C 32
7 C 33
8 0 34
9 A 35
10 C 36
11 ---------------------------- 37
) 12
38
13
39
14
40
15
41
16
42
17
43
18
44
19
45
20
46
21
47
22
48
23
49
24
50
25
51
26
52

P.5. jushi
Page 1 of 1
.---------------------.----.----------------.-----------.--.-
-.- - - ------ - --- -- -.-.- - ---- ---- - ---.-- - -----'-- -------.-.- - -'-- - --- - - -. - - -' ..-. ..- - _.
~-:':":-''''::'-_-:-_7_-:'':' :--:..:.-:..:.'=- -...::.' :_-:...::.--:-.::....-:..:.:--...:...:.
"C:...:- :.::=-:..:.-::-::::.--=:-..:...:.---=:-..:._..:...:.=.=::-..:-:-_-=- -=---":'-=.-:-":''':-::'=::::':-=-":,,,:,- .:_..::::._..: ..:. . __-:-:. .-:::-.:-._ "_'-.":"':':':.' ..
- .. _-~- ......",..:....
...•.•.•
~-~,-'---'''=:....~ .~='",.'"..:-.-"""-~=.-.-..:=.:..-=--''-'---'---''''-''''-- ....•••. ~'''''"='''.._.-._=-..:.,--=-'---=---'''-
~ •....• - '--~-~-"'-'- ",--' --- . '-.-""--'-'-----""~""""-;-------'-----._-~'".-'-:_----=---'~._.""--_.. -.~
.....__.

API 570 PREPARATORY

DAILY EXAM 5B - OPEN BOOK
(Refer to Attached PQR / WPS Documents)

Note: Tick only one alternative which you think is most appropriate.

1. Choose correct statement from the following:

a. The PQRshows root spacing of 1/8" and same shall be followed in production
welding.
b. PQRshows beval angle 37°. It shall be followed in production welding without
change.
c. PQRdoes not show backing ring, hence production weld also can not be with
backing ring
d. None of above is correct statement.

2. What condition below describes the results of the guided bend test?
a. The three bend tests are acceptable and the fourth one is not acceptable
b. The test result overall is acceptable
c. The test result is not acceptable due to the linear indication
d. The bend test result is indeterminable, carry out re-test.

3. The minimum qualified preheat temperature for the WPS is:

a. 200° F
b. 100° F
c. 75° F
d. 5 mm (3/16")

4. What welding process is qualified by this PQR?

a. GT A W
b. SMA W
c. GMAW
d. SAW

5.
What is the P number and the tensile strength of SA-106-C?
a. P No.1 and 70 ksi
b. P No. 1 and 60 ksi
)
c. P No.3 and 70 ksi
d. P No.3 and 60 ksi

6. In accordance with the PQR, the WPS is qualified for what welding positions?
a. Flat and horizontal
b. Flat, vertical, overhead and horizontal
c. Vertical and overhead
d. All positions

7. What is the F No. of an E 6010 electrode?

a. F 00. 4
b. F f\10. 3
c. F No.2
d. F No.1

4f'I S10 Open Look-S:3

P. S. Jcshi
P;1tJ~ 1 c,r 3
- ----------------------------------------- --------------------
-
--- -- - __ h
_
_. - -- - - -.--- - - --- -- ------- ---------~-_._---_. - -. - _. - -- - ---- - - -"- - --- -- - - "- - -." - - - - - ---
..

_
-

8. The welder who welded the test plate for PQR 101 is qualified to weld in what
position?
a. Flat
b. Flat and horizontal
c. Flat and vertical
d. Flat, vertical and horizontal

9. The bend test specimens used are side bend. They are:
a. Not accepted since 2 face bend and 2 root bend must be used
b. Accepted since as alternative to (a) 4 side bend may be used
c. Accepted since only 2 bend tests are required where as 4 bend tests are
performed
d. Not accepted since all 3 types of bend tests (face, root, side) are required.

10. As far as thickness ranges for Base Metal (B.M.) and weld metal (W.M.) as shown on
WPS are concerned, your decision about the qualified range is:
a. B.M. is okay and W.M. is not okay.
b. Both B.M. and W.M. are okay.
c. Both B.M. and W.M. are not okay.
d. W.M. is okay and B.M. is not okay.

11. PWHT of PQR test coupon shows "No PWHT". It means that the PWHT for
a. WPS may be with PWHT
b. WPS must be without PWHT
c. WPS must be with PWHT
d. WPS may be with or without PWHTas PWHTis non-essential variable

12. In production welds, if groove design is changed to double V groove for the qualified
base metal thickness, as per ASME Sec. IX will you:
a. Accept the change - since it is non-essential variable
b. Will not accept - since it is essential variable
c. Accept only if okay by radiography
d. Accept only if okay by both radiography and UT

13. Based on the specimen areas provided in PQR, are the ultimate stress calculations
correct (as rounded up to psi) for specimen Tl and T :
2
a. Calculation is okay for Tl alone.
b. Calculation is okay for T2 alone.
c. Calculations for both are okay.
d. Calculations for both are not okay.

14. Which condition below best describes the result of tensile tests reported on the PQR?
a. Test T1 & T2 are acceptable
b. Test T1 & T2 are unacceptable
c. Test T1 is acceptable & T2 is unacceptable
d. Test T1 is unacceptable & T2 is acceptable
J. ~J <;:;leCI.I uue c/O! 0 shown all VV!-J~ is chall:;ed to EiOl:3, vvhat is your decision?

a. Revise WPS to show the change and re-submit as new revision

b. No revision of WPS is necessary .:JS both belong to same F number.

Pa'Je 2 of 3
------------ -.---- -.- ------- -------_.- - -- ---- --_. --------- - -- ---- - - --- - ---- ----.----- --.
•.'.------------------.-.------------------.---------~--_._--
- - . ---.-----.----- .. -.----.--.--. - -- -'-_._-._ .. - ..--- ....- ..- ----. "- -------.-.---------

c. A new PQR will be required to support the change.

d. No revision of WPS required but show the change in same PQR and submit
it as new revision

P.S. Joshi
Page J uf 3
----------------------.--.----. --------------------------------
- --.--.------.- -------- ._-- - -- - --- - - - ---------.-- - - - -.- - ._-- _. - -- --- - -.-. ------- ._. --.---- -- - ------- .. .. --'---- - -
-'--., .-----.----- -----.- - -----'-- ----.- '-'--- --. -~--- --- - - ------- -- - -- ---- - --- - - - _._. -
- - ----.-.------------. _' 'H __ • __ •• -- _ .••• -- .--.- --~--- •• -'---'--- -----_._~._. • •• __ ._._. ' ,_,, __ , . __ • __ • U •• ._ •• '. __ ._ •. __ ~ _

.. .. .... -. ---
--.- "'''-''c--.",',-,,,-'',..., ,, . - .. -... _ .. '" _ "._' __ '__ n '" __ .• _. -''''_"'"-''~_.--' __'.•.-,-_,,--,-
- - ••• -" '4 •• '. . _.

- --.
- . _ _--_. ----
-'.
.. -. ,.
_

.--.-

API 570 PREPARATORY

Daily Exam 58 - Open Book
Answer Key

1 D
2 B
3 B
4 B
5 A
6 D
7 B
8 A
9 B
10 D
11 B
12 A
13 C
14 C
15 C
16 --------------------------------
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
2S

l\.J',~ 1. ot 1
----------------------------------------------------------------.---.-
.-- .-----. -- ------ ---- ---- - -- --- ------- ----- - ------------- -- - ------- -- -------- - --- -- - --
-- -- -- - ----------------- -- - ---- --- - ----- - - u
-----
_
--

- -- -- -------- -- --- - -- -- -------

-.--- -------
------
--- ----- - ------
- -- -- --- - -- - ----- --- - --
-- ---- - --- -- -- - ---.-- -- - -- - ---- - --
- - ----- -- --- ----

AP/574 Quiz
1. AP/574 Covers inspection of
C. piping
D. vessels

2. Cast iron pipe can be jOined by:

A. Welding
B. compression
C. epoxy resin .
D. bell and spigot

3. The primary purpose of inspection is to achieve the desired quality assurance and:
A. ensure plant safety
B. supply the necessary paperwork for outside audits
C. complicate maintenance activities
D. create an avenue for dismissing craftsmen \

4. Ultrasonic
thickness .. thickness readings at areas with surface temperatures above are normally higher than actual
A. 1000P
B. 2000F
C. 3060F
D. 2120C

during:
5. Flame detectors used to indicate a furnace or boiler fire may give erroneous indications on control panels

A. Welding or related repairs on piping.

B. Piping alterations in the shop.
C. ultrasonic inspection.
D. radiographic inspection.

6. Leaks in a thread may be caused by:

A. Lck-welding the fitting.
B. Lack of thread lubricant.
C. Under-pressuririg the part.
D. Changing the direction of flow in the piping system.

7. A leaking threaded jOint should not be tightened while the system is in service under pressure because:

A. The craftsman should not be near the threaded connection.

B. b Rust or corrosion might be holding the pressure.

C. C. The joint might be unscrewed.

D. D. A crack in a thread root might fail.

8. During a pressure test, care should be taken not to:

A. Allow any inert gas into the system.
8. b. Use water in the system.
C. C. Overpressure the system.
D. D. Underptessure the system.

9. Wh;ch of the follOWing tests should lilt be uspd on cast iron piping:

A. Radiographic test

8. b_ Leak test

D. rJ. Hamrnpr te:,t

1J. The details of inspection of in ·service piping 2i"€ provided in:

KOM
- --- - -- --- ---- - _._-- --- - -------------.- - - - -.-- - -- --- - ---- - - - --- - ---.--.----.---------------
--
- -"- -.- - -- ---.- - - -- - - - .- .- - - -

A. ASMEIX

B. b. ASME 831.3

C. C. API 570

D. D. ASME 8 16.5a

11. t = PDI2SE is the formula for:

A. Required Piping Thickness

B.. Maximum Piping Thickness

C. Arbitrary Renewal Piping Thickness

D. Average Piping Thickness-

12. API RP 574 is a:

A. Code

B. Standard

C. Specification

D. Recommended Practice

13. During the manufacturing of tubing, the tubing may be welded, but is generally:

A, Riveted.

B. Seamlessly drawn.

C. Wire drawn.

D. Forged.

14. A globe valve is commonly used to:

A. Prevent back flow.

B. Allow full flow.

C. Stop al/ flow.

D. Regulate fluid flow.

15 A check valve is commonly used to:

A. Prevent back flow.
B. Allow full flow.
C. Stop al/ flow.

API 574 Qujz Answer Key

1. C Paragraph 1.1
.2. D Paragraph 4.5.5 "',' c
'''.3. A Paragraph 5.1
4. B Pdragraph 10.1.2.1 5. D Paragraph 10. i ;2.7-
G. B Parilgrolph In2.1.5,} 7. I) P,];'agrar,h 102.1.5.3 8, l:
PI] 1.0,2.5 11. ,\ .Iragr,lph 11..1.12:) iU:';w0rd
Li. l3 ,''''J c:glaph 4.2
11. D Paraqnph 'l.J,] 15, A P;;r.lgraph '1'~ 8

KOM
Page 2 of 2
-.--------- --------------------------------------------- ..-

------ - ----- -- - -- - - --- - - --- -------- ----.-------- ------- ---- ---- - --- ... ----- - -- .. -.
--:.-..:..-:.:::..-=.:..:-
.._--~------ :...:~:"--~
--: .. ---- _--:-::-=-~-. --. -..:..- ~---.-- -._-- --- -----:---:-.:--=-- _.~---:-.:..-=---:-:----::--:_-----~--_. __ ._ .._--------- -- ----_._----~~--._- - ------
.. u_~_.. _ "."_-. _". __~~ __ ~_ .. " _"~."-_~. ~_ ..
ASME B31.3 Quiz

1. All welding terms found in ASME B31.3 are found in the Code and:-)

A. ASME Section -~ ~ B. ASME Section y ~ C. AWSA2.4 vD. AWS A3.0

2. A fluid service in which the potential for personnel exposure is j~dged to be significant: .

C)VA. Category ¥ Fluid Service

\ B. High PressUre Fluid Service C. Normal Fluid Service
D. CategoryB Fluid Service

3. Snow and ice loads due to both environmental and operating conditions are considered:

t [)ead loads ~ <-J!)Live Loads

'C.lvironmental Loads D. Structural Loads

" The required thickness of straight sections shall be determined in accordance with Eq. 2, _

., tm = t + d B, tm = d -t
:l tm = t + C D. tm = C -t
- 5. Socketwe1lts-slToutmrndrr.--
-.----------------.-------.--------
.- - - -- - ---. - -.- - - - - -- - - - -- - ---- -- ---- - ------------- - - -- - - --- - ---- ------ - - - _ ...• ...

:~~ =-.-.::~::~_.:.-:.:.=_--:::.- :..._::-=-::_-:-.:::::-:..~=_-.:::::: __._-.:.:-.-_-

~~f--itf.ififplFiii¥it-er;i:=~=B-;:.b~tlSed_jji_=at[:we1ded_:mi:iiflg::--:.::-:-::-:::-:--.:-_::-::-:-
vc. beweldedusingSAW_only .
(!!Jte avoided wbeie crevice corrosion may OCcur.

6. A Charpy V -notCh specimen for impact testing shall be made using a standard:

(DA. 1/2" square cross section \ B. 10 Msquare cross section

v"'''c. 10 mm square cross section D .. 505 " square cross section

A.
7. AS: ME B 31.3of welding procedures
Qualification to be used in compliance with .. ;, IVSME B 31.3 shall conform tlVthe requirements of: IV H;i;;;'1"
B. BPV Code, Section IX r lV\ c. API570
L vD. BothAandB

8. Subject to the specific approval of the Inspector, welding procedures qualified:

':\ v'''~. by others may be used

J ,; B. by the employer only may be used

:. by.the
) use of AWS prequalified, D1.1 type procedures, may be used D. by the use of API 1104 qualified procedures may be used

I. A IV DCEP Electrode in the A WS A5.1 is:

•. E7018 .",£. E7016 1V6024 (: 1;7"6010 10. A welder may pass a performance qualification test for Company A, quit the job, then be
ired by Company B, to perform similar work, and not have to retest.

'J True IV False

:::-.True only in certain states

. False, in compliance with ASME B 31.3

t. Filler metal shall conform to the requirements of:

AWSA5.1 (f!}) Section IX 1-(:'. Section V

). API570

1I.C ASME 831.3 Summary, Spring,2003 Page4.16

12. Circurnferencial welds inside surfaces of groove welds shaH be aligned:

---------------------------------------.-----.-
JJ 1L
-------------
- A;--l--or>-l:-/16 --B;-+-or.;-r/3-2 --~--- --- -------------.- ...--- -- -- __ --- _ -.- --------------- ..-- _

~;t:~::I;j]~6fiaT~=ffi~:fj;:-W~S.:£.Y-D..:~1'.atii_JCatQi_r.s_~1l00~:::~:_=....:_-:-::~::~-:....~~-; ;::,:::~::-,:.:=::_-:::::::~::_--=:-:=,:.::-:_=:: ::_-.~::-::::_=:::.. _=~-:.;::__-

_.
13. The root pass and finar pass of a weld may not be:

1 0) "'. peened
,B. cleaned
i", C. stress relieved
c,Cf,,,, D. painted

14. A threaded joint may be seal welded by a qualified welder if:

.....
: "",,;A. the joint is r"'aking

8. the joit: 1t has straight tbreads onry '" the joint has tapered tl1reads only (:9 all exposed threads are covered

_5. The preheat zone shall extend at least ~beyond the edge of the weld .

•. 10 mm iR'" ./B. 1 inch

J( )mm
'. 3 inches

5. The OWp"'r's Inspector shall have:

an API 570 Certification

---'\ B. an A WS CWI Certification u,,,.J C. an API 510 Certification

not less than 10 years experience dealing with piping

'. In ,e,'ew'ng
:"'pJ,@le? codlog'aphy of a Noemal Flold Se""ce piping weld a ceack was noticed. If the pipe wall Wos .;;"J>, w-a--E, ""ck I§.

lone B. T/3
3/16"
D. cracks will not show on radiographs

:kAninexaminer performing a PT test of a completed weld on the outside of a Category 0 Fluid Service piping system noted a transverse
the root pass:
J
The weld is acceptable
'he PT test should be repeated
he welder should be requalified

,The PT test will not show this type of discontinuity from the outside. I, I L/ '"
: ASME 831.3 Summary, Spring, 2003 Page 4- 17
19. Individual slag trapped in a weld in SeVere CyclicConditions piping system, maximum length may be: '"
--.----- --------------
- :N>TN3 C\,:;;; NTW73-------------- ---------------------------~-- ---_._--~-------
_
q::-r-{.;"-"" 12T-D.<im:q- --.~~~_~~
- - - n -- ----

__
-~:-"._,, -_;--_"
-------------

_ --
------------- -- -------

:~:: ._~_"" m

_ _

20. Examiners may be qualified in compliance with:

A. AS:M:ESection IX \ B. AS:M:ESection V
C.j t'C] ASNTS", -TC -IA"'. API570

API ASME 831.3 Quiz Answer Key

1. 0 (Paragraph 300.2 Page 2) 2. A (Para. 300.2 b page 5)

""';;.;,3. B (Para. 301.6.1 page 12)

..,4. C (Para. 304.1.1 a Page 19) 5. 0 (Para. 311.2.4 Page 34) 6. C (Para. 323.3.3 Page 52)
'. 0 (Para. 328.2.1a Page 59) 8. A (Para. 328.2.2 Page 59)
ara
I. r-r . 328.2.2g Page 60) 10. A (Para. 328.2.3 Page 60) 11. B (Para. 328.3 Page 60)
2. C(Para. 328.4.3 Page 61)

3. A (Para. 328.5.1d Page 62) 14. 0 (Para. 328.5.3 Page 64) 15. B (Para. 330.1.4 Page 66) 16. 0 (Para. 340.4 Page 75)
7. A (Table 341.3.2 Page 76) 18. 0 (Table 341.3.2 Page 76) 19. B (Table 341.3.2 Page 76) 20. C (Para. 342.1 Page 82)

~ASMEB31.3Summary,Spring, 2003 Page4-19

; :-1
---------------------------------------------------------
-- - - - - - - -- - -- - - - - - - -- - - - - - - -- - - -- - - - - - -- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -- - -- - - --

Welding and Cutting Processes I -" Answer Key

-'
,.. , ..

1. c 19.
114. c 2.d d 20. b 3. b 21. a 4. a 22. d 5. c 23. d 6. c 24. d 7. d 25. b 8. b 26. d 9. d 27. e 10. d 28. elL
c 15. c 29. c 12. d 30. b 13.
\, 16. b 17. a 18. d

~AC API 570 Weld Processes, 1999 Page 6- 31 __'. III", "(""'iw", ".. \" ';;/ ; c.--,---#-
,
F

API 570
Daily Exam 4C - Closed Book

0.1 A typical soil corrosion is aggravated under which of the following conditions

a. Hgh moisture content and high resistivity of soil.

/b. Hgh moisture content and low resistivity of soil. .
c. Low moisture content and high resistivity of soil.
d. Low moisture -content and low resistivity of soil.

0.2 Typical "high cycle fatigue is:

a. Thermal fatigue.
b. Mechanical fatigue.
~c. Vibration fatigue.
d. Both a and b.

0.3 Reduction in likenhood of brittle fracture can be obtained by performing

Impact testing
Hydrostatic testing
PWHT
Pneumatic testing

0.4 Thermal fatigue cracks usually are

a. Branching, Transgranular and initiate from within the material.

b. Dagger shaped, intergranular and initiate form within the material.
.•.c. Dagger shaped, oxide filled and initiate form the surface.
d. Dagger shaped, clean and intergranular.

(§Y=rosion/corrosion mitigation can be achieved by

a. Increasing the pipe diameter to decrease velocity

b. Increasing surface hardness by using harder alloys or hard facing
c. Using corrosion resistant alloys
,/ d. All of the above.

Q.6 "Clam shell" type crack failure having concentric rings called "beach marks"
showing "waves" of crack propagation is typically the description of
:/- yo'
;;
r -I a. Mechanical Fatigue cracks ..
.- b. Creep cracks.
c. Stress corrosion cracks.
d. Hydrogen induced cracks.

0.7 Resistance to sulphidation is generally achieved by

a. Upgrading to higher nickel alloys

I b. Upgrading to higher chromium alloys
c. Upgrading to higher copper based alloys
d. All of the above ..

0.8 Characteristic Chloride SCC in Austenitic S.S. generally will be

~a. Transgranular, branching and aggravated by highertemperature.

b. Intergranular and unidirectional (straight) and aggravated by increasing
temperature
c. Independent of chloride content
d. None of the above

0.9 Caustic embrittlement may be reduced/prevented by::

a. Conducting PWHT.
b. Upgrading to Nickel alloys.
c. Using High hardness & High strength steels.
J d. Both a and b.

0.10 High temperature hydrogen attack is typically due to

{J Methane gas formation.
\/')5. Wet H2S formation
c. Temper embrittlement
d. Presence of Molybdenum in alloy steels.